Home

File No. SME11002600 R110621J9200-TTEC Ver00_2011-08

1. e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 116 3 Printer specific Adjustments c Click Maintenance for the desired profile The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed TopAccess eFaling Logout User Management Administration Device Job Status Logs Registration Counter Setup ICC Profile General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Service ICC Profile Version Profiles Setting RGB Source Profile Default Profile SourceRGB_v10 TT Maintenance Default Profile SourceCMYK_v10 Destination Profile Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric 2003 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved d Click Browse of Import new Profile to select a file for the profile Then click Import Maintenance Destination Profiles aaa Default Profile OutputCMyK_v10 MS_OP_AOD icc Import new Profile File Name C Users x00x Documents W ork_Im Current Profiles US Sheetfed Coated v2 USSheetfedCoated icc Euroscale Coated v2 EuroscaleCoated icc e Click Previous The display returns to the ICC Profile submenu f Click Save A confirmation dialog box is displayed g Click OK For the details of TopAccess see the TopAccess Guide e STUD
2. ccccccecsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeaees 1 5 1 2 2 To Adjust the Density on a Photo or Gradational Image cccseeeeeeeeeees 1 8 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for the Paper Used To eliminate blur and graininess from an image cccceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeees 1 11 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions To optimally program image quality control ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 1 16 To Correct Out of Registration Colors cccccseececseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseaes 1 23 Toc stomize the image densi sirsie eee eee 1 27 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 To Copy Text Clearly To eliminate faint smudged or blurred text 2 1 2 1 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 2 2 1 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode c 0cccccee 2 5 2 1 3 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Auto Color Mode cccceeeee 2 7 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original ccccecceseeeeeeeeeees 2 9 To Improve the Reproducibility Of Gray cccccceeccceseeeseeeeeneeeesaeeesaeeeseees 2 13 TOC Oy HA VV ICONS eea E EE E ENEN 2 15 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper To improve the AUGIAING MU RE OVOGUGIOINGY cecscacetassencseescssaccencecraces
3. Auto color when judged as black 05 7806 Set a value larger than Text Photo i 128 f oa Auto color when os judged as black 05 7807 Text Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper The adjustment value for color mode will be adopted if the original is judged as color with the ACS function After setting the value copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 7 2 Copier specific Adjustments W 4 Enter the adjustment mode 05 and adjust the gamma balance in each of medium and high density areas _ Recommende Acceptable Original mode 05 code Subcode elie cae Auto color when judged as black Text Photo Set a value larger Auto color when posse ue than 128 ae a judged as black 05 7958 Text Auto color when judged as bl
4. Substitute Colors Bo Combine Separations Auta Trapping e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 34 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 3 Select areas to be printed only with K toner in Print gray using black only RGB e Off All the gray areas are printed with four toners C M Y and K e Text Graphic The gray areas of text and line arts graphics are printed only with K toner e Text Graphic Image All the gray areas are printed only with K toner Expert Golor Settines RGB Source Profile Rendering Style Fiery RGE v5 Presentation o Print gray using black only RGE RGE Separation f Simulation f Output CMYK Simulation Profile CMYK Simulation E 150 Coated Full Qutput GCA Output Profile Print Gray using Black Only f Use Media Defined Profile Text Graphics Imae f Use Output Profile Fiery TeQ45ChMFP Plain IF am v Spot Color Black Text Graphics Pure Black Un r B Eg B bd Black Overprint Text Graphics i Update Cancel Precautions after the completion of the adjustment When color photographs are printed only with K toner the printed images may look rougher In order to avoid this check the printed images carefully and adjust them e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 35 6 Printer spe
5. 3 15 3 16 3 17 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance cccccccecccceeceeseeeeeeeeeesseeeesseeeesaaeees 3 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper 3 3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance cccccccccceececceeeeseeeesaeeesseeesaaeess 3 5 To Closely Match the Color Balance on the Monitor cccseseeeseeeeeeees 3 13 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue To maintain Consistency in Gray among Text Photos and Graphics ccccccceeceeceeceeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 3 16 To Use Only the Black Toner to Reproduce Gray Areas To use only the black toner to reproduce black and white photos or gradational TAG CS ee E E EE E EER 3 19 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness ccccceceeeseeeeeaeeeesaeeesaeeeesaaes 3 23 To Adjust the Overall Saturation ccccccccseccccseeeeceeeesseeeeseeesessaeeesaeseesaees 3 26 To Easily Adjust the Overall Contrast cccccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeesaeeeeseees 3 30 TOO orale Siaroe PIAL WAVES 6 eese E 3 33 FiO OD Talia SOMen WAG S a E E 3 36 To Make Low resolution Data Look Finer To soften an image 06 3 39 To Eliminate Smudges from Highly Colored Text and Lines To prevent toner scattering around text and lines where a large amount of toner is IS OO cogeci ease cnsh E 3 42 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 46 3 14 1 To Adjus
6. Custom Color Settings Setting 1 Photograph a Halftane Resolution H Jetal 2 600dpi Distinguish Thin Lines Pure Black Text Graphic amp Image Black 0 int E i Black Overprin Text amp Graphic PostScript Overprint Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 55 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GET This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing Open the print dialog box Select Detail from among the Halftone options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Halftone 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Halftone Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 1 Color Type Halftone v Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type General HH Black Over Print Text and Graphics HH Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto HH T PDFw Preview Cancel Print After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 56 3 Printer specific Adjustmen
7. 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 2 TEO 5 2 Copier specific Adjustments After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Text mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Enter adjustment mode 05 Decrease the values for codes 7097 7098 7252 7102 and 7103 to make the text darker improving faint text or thin lines Recommended Acceptable Auto color when Set a value smaller judged as black 05 7102 than 2 0 to 4 2 Text Photo Auto color when judged as black 05 7103 Text Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 3 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 6 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7190
8. 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 18 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box A large number of sheets are printed hundreds of copies or more per day and the image quality needs to be constantly maintained Change the value for code 08 2509 to reduce the accumulated number of printed sheets It will determine the interval until the next image quality control is performed After a copy or print job is completed if the accumulated number of printed sheets exceeds the specified value image quality control will be performed Accumulated number of printed sheets before image quality control is 50 to 999 50 to 999 sheets 1000 1000 sheets default After setting the value for code 08 2509 forcibly perform image quality control as follows Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button After performing the adjustment print and check the image quality After performing the adjustment print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure The image quality needs to be constantly maintained in continuous printing Since image control cannot be performed without a printing interruption if the number of sheets for 08 2509 is set to 500 or less do so also for 08 9199 Accumulated number of printed sheets before image quality control is Value for 08 2509 performed 50 to 200 50 to 20
9. Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Bt a Ws Enter setting mode 08 Change the value to adjust the density of a solid area during the copying printing operation e Use steps a to c to perform the adjustment a Enter setting mode 08 Change the values for codes 2513 to 2514 to adjust the developer bias output value The necessary correction amount varies according to the installation environment or usage of consumables such as the developer material and drum In this adjustment the correction amount is varied only by specified values Use 05 2662 for the density adjustment of solid areas e Decreasing the value will make the solid colored area become lighter decrease the amount of toner on the solid colored area On the other hand increasing the value will make the solid colored area become darker increase the amount of toner on the area The value to use varies according to the paper type and color to adjust Check the code to use in accordance with the following Code list and refer to the Value list to select a proper value Code Paper type Color to adjust 08 code Y yellow M magenta i Plain paper aS 08 2513 K black Full col eee Y yellow Thick M magenta 08 2514 C cyan K black Value Correction value for developer bias Density of the solid colored output area 0 Value automatically set 100_ Light 1 Value automatically set 80 o o 2
10. D BCl 8G6 Gy Fiery ACE yi D MEGA D Fiery TDA ICHTE Main w D Fiery Tea MFF Thick D Fiery Tel ICMHFE Sprcia Fiery Tel TCMIF Fuin w Label in Driv r Dttripii n Appli Standard ar Adobe ROE CCIRGE MERYECA DRGS venion f Label in Derpeer Trot Dewire Clans Calibre lan Cr si Label in Driver Calibration ai Media type ooo n 1 cpl PER Copyraght Fain Plain Recyrled Tranaparency 3 Thich Paper Thick L Paper Thicket Paper Thack3 Paper Thickd Paper Special foercial 1 pacia special 2 Alain Click to edit Color Son Fiery Ted4 5CMFP Plain vif Cop AOR fiers Tes SME Blige ice Fiery Tet oCMeP Plain w1 Lpy 1 Outsut Durgut Main 7 0 8 GEOG Oh bf Anta LLOGI Osla Coocpregha ich Denrgnicp for imaging inc 7008 A righ mirret If you created the profile with EFI Color Profiler install the profile in the GA 1211 using Profile Manager e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 6 9 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 7 Select Thick 2 Paper for the Media Type field in Output Profile Settings Also change the name in Profile Description to a comprehensive name if required In the illustration below the name is changed to Thick 2 8 Select Thick 2 Paper for Calibration Calibration Set Then click OK Output Profile Settings Profile Description
11. Fiery TeO4S5CMEP Thic vlF Copy 1 Label in Driver Unassigned Media Type Recycled Thick1 Paper vi Thick Paper Ti i l Pi Calibration Media Thick2 Paper lt Hint gt The details of setting items in the Output Profile Settings are as follows Profile Description Enter the name of the profile displayed on the printer driver menu during two way communication Calibration Set Select a Calibration Set to be assigned to the profile so that the calibration data for the selected media type will be applied to the profile The calibration data for the media type will be sent from the Calibration Set to the printer engine when the Measurement Page is printed out during calibration Never assign a wrong Calibration Set because it is an important setting for image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 10 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Label in Driver Appear in One Way Communication Driver as Set the name of a custom profile Output 1 to 10 displayed on the printer driver menu during one way communication Note that this setting is not linked to the setting of the media type The name set in this section is not displayed but the one set in Profile Description is displayed during two way communication For the details of two way communication refer to the installation guide of the GA 1211 Media Setting When a ce
12. Save Current Settings az Hame Setting 1 Original Image Quality Type Advanced k Halftone Resolutiors Apply to W Pure Gray Auto r Apply to W Black Overprint Ter Gash PostScript Overprint Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 105 3 Printer specific Adjustments XPS E I 4 Uncheck Use Sharpness Filter on the Image Attribute tab menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast a E 4 _ Brightness 4 4 po jp J E Background Adjustment 0 l 0 Hl Saturation er os LI Use Sharpness Filter i 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help E 5 Select None on the CMYK Source Profile option on the Advanced tab menu At this step you can set any printer profile Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Frofiles RGE Source Frofile Printers Default k Protile j Destination Protile Printer s Default Rendering Intent f Printers Default f Perceptual C Relative Colorimetric C Saturation f Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Mow Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 106 3 Printer specific Adjustments E II 6 Uncheck Apply to Device Color Only Setting Basic
13. To print images stored through Scan to Box Before the adjustment After the adjustment Scan to Box Scan to Box RGB data RGB data e Filing box e Filing box Stored Stored Ex Printing image mode Presentation Ex Printing image mode Photo Print Print Converted into Converted into print data print data Unless the printing image mode is selected When the printing image mode suitable for the printing may be performed with image stored data is selected the data can be printed processing not suitable for the stored data finely with optimal image processing e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 16 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Explanation When an image is scanned stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box in the Full color or the Auto color mode and printed as it is without the printing image mode set printing may be performed with image processing not suitable for the image and the user may not obtain the desired image quality To finely print a full color image scanned and stored select the printing image mode General Photograph Presentation Line Art suitable for the image Then printing can be performed with image processing optimal for the image in the same manner as printing on the printer driver Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustm
14. Value automatically set 60 O C o S O 7 Value automatically set 40 Value automatically set 60 10 lt Hint gt Adjust the values for the following codes in order to adjust colors with RGB Adjustment of R Red Adjust Y Yellow and M Magenta Adjustment of G Green Adjust Y Yellow and C Cyan Adjustment of B Blue Adjust M Magenta and C Cyan e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 6 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed and the image density will be corrected lt Note gt The above corrections will be effective immediately after the values for codes 08 2513 to 2514 are changed After changing the values for codes 08 2513 to 2514 remember to perform image quality control for code 05 2742 c After completing image quality control print and check the print image quality Repeatedly use steps a to c as necessary to select a proper value If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure E I i A 2 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum developer material and transfer belt unit and replace them if necessary e When replacing any consumable use steps a to b a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding t
15. 1f the setting value of the adjustment code is 103 25 from the default value the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is 3 If the step is set at 4 the image quality will not be changed 2 I SRE E Default Setting value 103 100 50 50 25 0 25 50 75 100 Assigned adjustment value of sharpness 100 100 75 50 25 0 25 50 75 Since 25 is assigned to the center the image quality remains the same even if the indicator is changed from 3 to 4 2m lt Note gt Sharpening the copy image and Minimizing moir are mutually contradictory When an adjustment is performed to sharpen the copy image moir may occur e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 44 2 Copier specific Adjustments LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular LJ Remarks e Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in copier performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 42 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 10 To Make Photo Edges Look Softer Before the adjustment After the adjustment The edges contours of the image are highly The edges look soft visible Explanation When a photo image is copied the contours or e
16. 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Beit 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 3 To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer Explanation ICC profiles for CMYK ink series provided by each ink manufacturer are disclosed and distributed by some websites and some users want to make a simulated printing using one of these profiles This simulation is possible by using ICC profiles for CMYK ink of particular ink manufacturer as a CMYK source profile LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings E 1 Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software E I 2 Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu Then upload the desired CMYK source profile and printer profile e Follow a to g below to upload the profiles a Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu b Open the Setup menu and the ICC Profile submenu e Filing Logout Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Servicqj ICC Profile fVersion Save Cancel e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved gei 3 Printer specific Adjustments c Click Maintenance for the desired profile The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed TopAccess eFaling Logout User Man
17. Black K toner Black K toner Black K toner Black K toner Color CMYK toner Black K toner Black K toner Color CMYK toner Color CMYK toner Color CMYK toner Black K toner The above table shows the sample combinations of when the Image Quality Type is General When Auto is selected the areas to be applied are automatically selected according to the Image Quality Type e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 20 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Black amp Gray Text Graphic amp Image from among the Pure Black and Gray options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Pure Black and Gray 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Pure Black and Gray Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO io Presets Standard Color Settings 1 HH Color Type Halftone Pry Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type General Black Over Print Text and Graphics 7 PDFw C Preview Cancel LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment allows gray areas to always be reproduced using only the K toner As a result color photos may look mo
18. Change the values for codes 7236 and 7237 to make the range correction operation fixed e The code to be set differs depending on the density mode Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 Original Density Recommended Acceptable psjcode Taine range value Peteut 05 7237 Explanation for setting values Setting value Range correction operation Fixed e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 74 2 Copier specific Adjustments To increase the sharpness intensity This adjustment is effective when you want to copy light text thin lines or illustrations more clearly a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value of the code 7249 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity 05 code Recommended Acceptable Default mode value range value Set a value larger than Black User custom 05 7249 128 0 to 255 128 129 to 228 lt Note gt Ifthe setting value is too large Moir may appear To copy text or lines more clearly a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Increase the value for the code 7252 to make the text and lines darker improving faint text or thin lines Original Acceptable 05 7252 Set a value larger than 2 lt Note gt Ifthe setting value is too large the life of consumables may be shortened To adjust copy density a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change t
19. Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 1 To Adjust the Tint of Colors other than Black Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments i 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the TWIN COLOR COPY button Select the Twin color copy mode from among the twin color copy mode options e To select Red and black mode Press the RED amp BLACK button e To select the Twin color selectable mode Use steps a through d to select the Twin color selectable mode a Press the TWIN COLOR SELECTABLE button b Press the CHANGE BLACK TO button Press the button for the desired color c Press the SECOND COLOR button Press the button for the desired color d Press the ENTER button Use procedure 2 MJ 2 Press the ADJUST button Press the button or the button for the color to be adjusted in order to adjust the tint of colors other than black e In the Red and black mode e Press the button to decrease yellow and the button to enhance magenta in order to enhance the tint of red e Press the button to enhance yellow and the button to decrease magenta in order to decrease the tint of red e In the Twin color selectable mode Press the button to enhance the tint of the color or the button to decrease it Press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to the density area low medium or high density area LJ Prec
20. Each Color J Detail Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 122 3 Printer specific Adjustments E i 4 Open the Image Attribute tab menu and then change each setting items to obtain the desired image quality Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Contrast 1 E c 4 p Brightness ee 7 a Background Adjustment SaaS 0 g E H Saturation iene 7 E g W Use Sharpness Filter 0 El Restore Defaults Cancel Help L Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 32123 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 26 To Switch Overprint Overlaid Images Overprint OFF Overprint ON When more than one color is overlaid the When more than one color is overlaid mixed color on the top is printed colors are printed Explanation Whether multiple colors overlaid on one area are printed in mixed colors or printed separately can be switched when PDF files containing an overprint command are printed in USB direct print Q Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments This adjustment will be effective only when PDF files containing an overprint command are printed in USB direct print E 1 Enter the adjustment mode 08 Change the value for the code 8513 t
21. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure a 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7960 to 7979 and 7980 to 7983 to adjust the density level of each color Yellow C map 08 7964 on Magenta Set a value larger than 128 C Map 057060 0 1 2 to increase the density Joass 128 Text Photo 05 7970 O 1 2 Set a value smaller than j 128 to decrease the ay Cyan O mp 05 7974 ono Black Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly vary the hues of areas including photo images and text other than those marked with highlighters Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including d
22. To Change Default Original Mode in Setting Mode 08 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 9976 to 2 to change the default original mode a mode automatically selected when the power of the equipment is turned ON to PRINTED IMAGE Setting value of 08 9976 Original mode at power ON Po Text Photo Default Text Map User custom e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 6 4 e Filing specific Adjustments LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The new default original mode in the copying function will be applied to all types of originals scanned with the default setting of the Full color mode Therefore perform the adjustment carefully while checking the copied images other than the one used as a reference of the adjustment e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 7 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 4 To Match the Color Balance on the Original To adjust the color balance in Print to Box Before the adjustment After the adjustment Print to Box l Print to Box e Filing box Image Quality Type e Filing box Image Quality Type Photograph General Stored Stored l Downloaded l Downloaded Client PC Client PC Displayed on the Displayed on the computer monitor computer monitor The image stored in the e Filing box looks The color balance of the image
23. through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the COLOR BALANCE button to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner C M Y and K or the RGB ADJUSTMENT button to adjust the color balance by changing the intensity of R G and B c Press the button to enhance the tint of the color or the button to decrease it After selecting the color balance by changing the amount of toner C M Y and K press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to density area low medium or high density area d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the tint of the colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure I 7 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7960 to 7979 to adjust the color density S38 to Acceptable e st Originai mode Originai mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Default a Magenta Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density 0 to 255 128 Photo Text Photo 05 7975 01 2 K 05 7976 O 1 2 Black _Text Photo 05 7970 O 1 2_ Set a value smaller than 128 05 7971 0 1 2 to decrease the density Cyan Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode
24. 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 102 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 To Use ICC Profile Explanation To interchange color images among several devices and reproduce precise color balance of the obtained images on each device ICC profiles are generally used This section introduces setting items that become available with the use of ICC profiles ICC profiles are available only for PS3 or XPS printer driver on Windows Note that Macintosh printer drivers do not support ICC profiles Q Procedures The setting procedure differs depending on how the user wants to use ICC profiles Follow the most suitable procedure referring to the subsections To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each Ink Manufacturer To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles or To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles according to the request from the user e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 103 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 1 To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used Explanation To create a new printer profile to be used when Advanced is selected in the Image Quality Type option patch printing for the printer must be performed but some users
25. 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 24 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 3 To Print in Desired Color Balance How to Use Color Editor Normal procedure Color Editor Adjust colors Store adjustment result Calibration Set profiles File for adjustment Application Open the file Execute print command Printer Driver Select profile Re adjust Check result When a profile is re adjusted printing must be repeated as well e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C Effective procedure File for adjustment Application Open the file Printer Driver Delete PPD data Print PS file XXXX pS Color Editor Adjust colors Download Test print Command WorkStation Hold queue i Calib ps Re adjust Check result The image adjusted with Color Editor can be easily printed by saving a file for adjustment in the hold queue as a PS file Only the sequence of the red arrows is repeated 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Explanation To change colors in printouts according to the user s request normally operations from 1 to 4 below must be repeated resulting the reduction of adjustment efficiency 1 Adjust the CMYK Simulation Profile or Output Profile setting according to the user s request using Color Editor 2 Name the adjusted setting and then save and regi
26. 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 61 2 Copier specific Adjustments LJ Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedure 2 F 1 Change the threshold for the Auto Color mode e Follow steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the USER FUNCTIONS tab on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER button c Press the COPY button d Change the threshold with the ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator If you move the indicator to the left the original tends to be judged as a black original If you move it to the right the original tends to be judged as a color original lt Hint gt The relation between the position of the ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator and the judgment result is shown below In the actual adjustment the threshold varies depending on the shape and size of the original or the density level of the original image Therefore use the table below only as a reference POTS o
27. 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 3 6 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh E This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Image Type option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Image Type 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Image Type Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 1 Color Type Halftone rd Distinguish Thin Lines Toner ave Image Type v General Photo Black Over Print Presentation LineArt Pure Black and Gray PDFw Preview Cancel This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 XPS and Macintosh It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed using the C M Y and K toners Unmark the Use PostScript Passthrough checkbox in the PostScript Setting options in the Others tab The Image Quality Type option will be effective if printing on Windows PS3 is performed but not on Macintosh or if a file created on the above applications is printed However the color balance may be changed and also the image qua
28. 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 17 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 9 Appendix Perform the e Filing setting according to the input and output methods of the data To scan black images more clearly in the Auto color Displaying on a mode computer monitor To scan an original while reducing its file size paspiaymie on computer monitor To scan color photos while avoiding Moir Copy to Box A e on a computer monitor 44 To match the color balance of the scanned image to Pintto Box Displaying on a that of the original computer monitor To scan and print originals while avoiding Moir Printing on paper clearly Print to Box E e eS Seven ES be displayed on a computer monitor computer monitor To print color images stored with the scanning function more clearly Scan to Box Printing on paper e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 18 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 1 To Clearly Scan Text To reduce noise around text Before the adjustment After the adjustment Color has always been an important part of life and is z i Color has always been an important part of life and is 5 a pa becoming more and more important in business documents 4 Color can be used to emphasize and prioritize information hife Bo a 5 Color can be used to emphasize and prioritize information be used to organiee material adding a logical sequenc
29. 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 4 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 3 To Store a Color Photo Image while Minimizing Moire Before the adjustment bf fi When the magazine article containing full Storing it in the Printed image mode will color photo images is stored in the Photo reduce moir mode moir is likely to occur Explanation When an original such as a magazine article containing full color photo images is copied in the Full color mode with the Photo mode selected and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box moir is likely to occur on the photo images It may also occur when it is copied on paper But it will be more enhanced if it is stored as image data Select the Printed image mode from among the original mode options in order to store full color photo images while minimizing moir LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 5 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Copy to Box This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Full color mode Wf 1 Press the BASIC tab on the Touch Panel and then select PRINTED IMAGE from the original modes The procedure to be used varies depending on cases when the original mode is set for each job set without templates when a template is used or when the default ori
30. 4 Select the uploaded RGB profile on RGB Source Profile on the Advanced tab menu Source Profiles AGB Source Profile CME Source Profile a os ll Printers Default If Apply to Device Color Only Profile 4 Destination Profile Printers Default Rendering Intent f Printers Default amp Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Mow Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 110 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 5 Select the uploaded printer profile on Profile of the Destination Profile option on the Advanced tab menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGE Source Profile aa Printer s Default a CMYK Source Protile PF Printer s Default jf Apply to Device Color Only Profile z b Destination Profile 8Printer s Default f Printers Default f Perceptual C Relative Colorimetric f Saturation f Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Mom L Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular LJ Remarks e Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on the models e The accuracy of color reproduction differs depending on printer profiles used e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C
31. 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Color Balance Brightness or Saturation Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 2 HH Color Balance Magenta Image Attribute Sharpness Brightness 74 PDF Preview After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 10 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 PS3 XPS EUV This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Wf 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8042 to 8065 to adjust the color density e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type General Halftone Auto gt Text area Graphic and image area Change the values of Smooth for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 C 05 0860 and K 05 8061 e When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Image Type Photograph Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 M 05 8051 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Color
32. 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 19 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 3 Open the Command WorkStation menu and select as follows File gt Import Job Command WorkStation 55 Edit Actions Go Server View Window Help Anoa Import Job a Con vice Center Servers eview Delete Calibrate Logs Pag GA 1211 D6 Ted45CMFP Job Status Job Title User Size Mu G gt Processing 4 Select a file Standard21 ps on the Select Files To Import menu then click Open Select Files To Import a gt ee oo HPS Files i Q DEVICES h t fe Macintosh HD TO To E iDisk 3 ee SHARED Custom 1 ps Custom34 ps All PLACES qo 4o PS t administrator F EFI 75xx Mac Standard34 ps ki Documents JN Applications Enable Supported File Types d Ha 5 Confirm that hold is selected in Default Action and then click Import 4 4 6 Import File s to be imported Add Remove Name Size fUsers administrator Desktop PS Files Standard 2 1 ps 13276 KB Import using Printer s Default 64 9 GB free of 65 4 GB sis j Aa e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 20 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 Select the file Standard21 ps remaining in the Held field of Command WorkStation Then double click the file icon
33. Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks e Not all colors may be printed precisely because the color gamut reproducible with MFPs differs depending on the models e The accuracy of color reproduction differs depending on printer profiles used e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 115 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 4 To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles Not Using Embedded ICC Profiles Explanation When a user s RGB images or CMYK images have embedded ICC profiles the user can ignore the embedded ICC profiles and apply a different ICC profile previously specified by the user so that he or she can obtain print images whose quality is equivalent to that of Fiery images LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings E 1 Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software E II 2 Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu Then upload the desired RGB source profile CMYK source profile and printer profile e Follow a to g below to upload the profiles a Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu b Open the Setup menu and the ICC Profile submenu e Filing Logout Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Servic ICC Profile Version Save Cancel
34. Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Mow Cancel Help 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 6 Select the uploaded printer profile on Profile of the Destination Profile option Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Protiles 2a Frinter s Default a CMYK Source Protile al Printer s Default B El Apply to Device Color Only Frotile Destination Profile Printer s Default Rendering Intent Printer s Default Perceptual 0 Relative Colorimetric O Saturation 5 Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults a Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments L Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular LJ Remarks Colors printed in this procedure may not be completely the same as those of Fiery images because the color measurement method of this procedure is not completely equal to the one for Fiery e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 120 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 5 To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles Explanation After printer profiles were applied by selecting Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the printer driver menu a user can perform further image adjustments LJ Procedur
35. For further information regarding the Output Preview refer to an appropriate manual or the Help menu of Acrobat 7 0 Professional e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 87 3 Printer specific Adjustments 1 Open a PDF file on Acrobat 7 0 Professional 2 Select Output Preview in the Advanced menu 3 Select a profile from among the Simulation Profile options Select the profile to use for the Monitor Simulation in order to print RGB data and the one to use for the Ink Simulation in order to print CMYK data from among the Simulation Profile options 4 Move the cursor over the data to check the color definition Then the color calibration will be displayed in percentage on Separations 3 Adobe Acrobat Professional 2 Phone Book falila Wri Edit rir ents To Hele al T ot E a o a Search es Create PDF eas Comment amp ee iz a Send for Review A Secure 4 Sign M GD Select iie Ia E F 100 With minimal preparation you can lessen the danger to yourself your family your home and property in the case of a natural disaster or other emergency Study this page obtain the items you may not have on hand and then share your plans with your family and immediate neighbors You will feel better knowing you have the supplies and strategy you need to deal with an emergency Bookm
36. G Green Adjust Y Yellow and C Cyan Adjustment of B Blue Adjust M Magenta and C Cyan e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 9 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed and the image density will be corrected lt Note gt The above corrections will be effective immediately after the values for codes 08 2525 to 2526 are changed After changing the values for codes 08 2525 to 2526 remember to perform image quality control for code 05 2742 c After completing image quality control print and check the print image quality Repeatedly use steps a to c as necessary to select a proper value If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure E I EW 2 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum developer material and transfer belt unit and replace them if necessary e When replacing any consumable use steps a to b a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value w
37. Generate Measurement Page 2 Check Print Settings Hi Intormat of the last cal ton ie ES Calibrator GA 1210 CAA1_TeO035CMFP Measured azeloy 2 51 09 PM By User Administrator Method a Rite DTF34 Restore Device e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 2 Configuration Page Server Info Password Enabled Yes Memory MB 256 Software EFI Fiery System de Version sky2 adhara1 0r 032a Disk Size ME 68948 Fres Disk Space MB 66356 Server Setup Servar Name GA 1211 247E Print Start Page Yes Use Gharacter Set Windows Allow printing fram All users Enable Printed Queue Yes Jobe Saved in Printed Queue 99 Enable Scan Yes Default Fle Format POF Clear Each Scan Job Afer 1 day Preview While Processing No USS Media Auto Print Disabled Enable Cancel On Mismatch Na Time Zone Los Angelas PST Daybght saving Yes Network Setup Port Seiup Elharnat Setup Erabi Elhemat Yes Ethernet Address O0 E0 81 78 24 7E Ethernet Speed Auto 1000 1000 Protocol Setup Enable AppleTalk Yes AppleTalk Zone Enable IPy4 Yes Ethernet Ethemet Setup Enable Auto IF Ganfiguration Po IP Address 10 150 100 156 Subnet Mask 255255255 Enable Gatewey automatically ha Gaeleway Address 10 150 100 4 DNS Setup Enable ONS No Enable IFP Yes Ethernet Ethemet Satup IP Address es feig COO OO Oee0 6 fered eps Enable IPXISPX Mo Sarvice Setup E
38. Graphic amp Image from among the Pure Black and Gray options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Pure Black and Gray 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Pure Black and Gray Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO HH g Presets Standard HA Color Settings 1 HH Color Type Halftone v Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type General Black Over Print Text and Graphics Preview After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 81 3 Printer specific Adjustments E G Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Use Black for All Text checkbox in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illust
39. If the step is set at 4 the image quality will not be changed e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 38 2 Copier specific Adjustments 4 3 2 I O 1 42 43 4 st Ho UUE U UU shee ee ee ee ee a a E Default 100 50 50 25 0 425 50 75 100 Assigned adjustment value of sharpness Setting value 103 199 100 75 50 25 0 425 450 75 Since 25 is assigned to the center the image quality remains the same even if the indicator is changed from g3 to 4 lt Note gt Minimizing moir and Sharpening the copy image are mutually contradictory When the adjustment is performed to minimize moir the resolution of the copy image may decrease Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks e Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 39 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 9 To Copy Sharply To enhance sharpness Before the adjustment After the adjustment The image looks light and blurred on the copy The edges are enhanced and the copy image becomes sharper Explanation Perform adjustment regarding image processing sharpness intensity in order to obtain a sharper copy image when
40. MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Sharpness option Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause outlined edges incorrect color of thin lines jaggies and variations in gradation As a result the photo image may look unnatural Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 54 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 14 2 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Black and White Mode Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 E 1 Change the Halftone option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Select Detail from among the Halftone options in the Basic tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute
41. Select the color you want to convert the non black part of the document e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 100 3 Printer specific Adjustments J 2 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 4 to 4 or to OFF in the Image Attribute tab Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast a 7 o 0 Brightness To o 4 Background Adjustment 4 7 0 4 Saturation 1 DESSES E _ H Use Sharpness Filter Restore Defaults Cancel Help The value OFF of sharpness intensity adjustment is positioned as shown below e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 101 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 3 To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors To adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black WJ 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8213 to 8215 to adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black As the set value is increased the area of CHANGE BLACK TO will become larger On the other hand if the value is decreased the area of SECOND COLOR will become larger Acceptable Apply to 05 code Recommended value stucrange DEUN Increase the set value to ea enlarge the black area ize 8215 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C
42. Sharpness ccccccccceccesseecceesseececeeseeeeseseeeessagseeessaseees 3 100 3 24 3 To Print a Full Color Original in TWO Colors cccccccseeeeeeseeeeseeseaeeeees 3 102 To Use ICO PO spares cts ccs ascents i eaaa aeaa kaiaa aaea iaaa 3 103 3 25 1 To Create ICC Profiles for Printing on the Paper to be Used 3 104 3 25 2 To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles 3 108 3 25 3 To Perform Simulated Printing with CMYK Inks of Each INK Manufacturer sisinivnsniverswenevactuiantnaiuisaintesweraesauunivewsieeuted 3 112 3 25 4 To Convert Colors with Specified Source ICC Profiles Not Using Embedded ICC POMS aene E see ve cese ourelews E E end ee seaeeseone utes aides asiee es 3 116 3 25 5 To Perform Further Adjustment After Using ICC Profiles 0 3 121 To Switch Overprint Overlaid Images cccceseecsseeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeees 3 124 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 4 8 4 9 To Clearly Store a B W Image in the Auto Color Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeees 4 1 To Store an Original while Reducing the File SiZ cccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 To Store a Color Photo Image while Minimizing Moir ccccseeceeeeeees 4 5 To Match the Color Balance on the Original To adjust the color balance in FOUN TOTO teat E eee eee as 4 8 To Scan and Print while Minimizing Moir cccccseee
43. TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 3 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 105 g m 16 to 20 Ib Bond Thick 1 106 to 163 g m Max 60 Ib Cover Thick 2 164 to 209 g m Max 110 lb Index Thick 3 210 to 256 g m Max 140 Ib Index Thick 4 257 to 280 g m Max 150 Ib Index e After adjusting the transfer roller bias output perform automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure 2 lt Hint gt The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased It is usually recommended that the set value be increased when you print on thick paper or paper with asperities on its surface On the other hand the set value should be decreased when you print on thin paper After adjusting the density print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure net Da 4 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum developer material and fuser unit and replace them if necessary e When replacing any consumable use steps a to c a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Imag
44. Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 11 2 Copier specific Adjustments Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure particularly when the highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 12 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 3 To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray Before the adjustment After the adjustment Another color M is blended in the gray area No undesired color is blended A clear copy image is obtained Explanation When an original containing gray is copied another color may be blended in the gray area Perform image quality control aut
45. Use steps a to c to perform the adjustment a Enter setting mode 08 Change the values for codes 2525 to 2526 to correct the intensity of the laser e Decreasing the value will make a photo or gradational image become lighter easily blurring the image but it will increase the gradation On the other hand increasing the value will make the photo or gradational image become darker and clearer but it will decrease the gradation The value to use varies according to the paper type and color to adjust Check the code to use in accordance with the following Code list and refer to the Value list to select a proper value Code Paper type Color to adjust 08 code Paper type a po Magen og eee 1 cr wee K ot __ Full color Y tell M r nagent __ Thick C _ eo 2 K black Density on the Correction value for intensity of the laser photo gra dational image 0 Value automatically set 100_ Light gradation more 1 Vane automatically set 80 OOOO oooO 2 Value automatically set 60 _ _ 3 Value automatically set 40 O 4 Value automatically set 20 Pp 5 Value automatically set Default 6 Value automatically set 20 o o oo o 8 Value automatically set 60 o o 9 Value automatically set 80 o o o O lt Hint gt Adjust the values for the following codes in order to adjust colors with RGB Adjustment of R Red Adjust Y Yellow and M Magenta Adjustment of
46. a light or blurred original is copied Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 WJ 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button Press the CLEAR button After selecting the Clear option copy and check the copy image quality When the copy image quality with the Clear option selected is insufficient cancel the Clear option and use the next procedure The one touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button again E T EW 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 40 2 Copier specific Adjustments Eji pa 3 Enter adjustment mode 0
47. a pattern for the out of registration colors There are 2 patterns for the out of registration colors Check which pattern the out of registration colors to adjust on the body are included Pattern A for out of registration colors Patch eliminated at Patch eliminated the leading edge trailing edge Eo Co 4 I r I BB OD OOA ODG ODA OEA OA OA OOA QA EDA ODA ODA DOA OOA MD l N l ab pt Page number Paper feeding direction Black belt at the leading edge in the paper feeding direction Pattern B for out of registration colors Patch eliminated at Patch eliminated at the trailing edge the leading edge e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C Paper feeding speed slower than transfer belt rotating speed Paper feeding speed faster than transfer belt rotating speed 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 24 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 5 Finely adjust the rotating speed of the registration motor in accordance with a pattern for the out of registration colors e Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 4523 Finely adjust the rotating speed of the registration motor e Adjust the values in accordance with a pattern for the out of registration colors as shown in the table below Pattern for Acceptab out of 05 Sub registration code code pecommendec value pion colors e ST
48. adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 43 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 8 2 To Change Default Setting of Sharpness Level Q Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 8119 to adjust the default value of the sharpness level sharpness intensity at the center value Acceptable Set a value larger than 128 to make the image sharper 05 8119 1 2 0 to 255 128 Set a value smaller than 128 to make the image softer The subcode varies according to the area where the sharpness is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Areas where the sharpness Line art graphics Photo Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 44 Imaging Manual r svupio2040c 2540c 3040c 3540c 4540c TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION
49. an Original while Enhancing Black ccccceccessseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 5 14 To Scan an Original with the Desired Gradation cccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 5 16 To Register the Original Mode Optimal for a Particular Type of Original To have CUSTOM selected ccecceeccceeceseeeceeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeeaeeeesaeetaeeeas 5 18 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance Calibration ccccccceeeeseseeeeeeeeeees 6 1 6 1 1 To Check Calibration History cccccccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesaeeeeeeeas 6 2 6 1 2 Types of Calibration and Their Order cceceeeeeceeeeeeeee cette ee eeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 6 4 6 1 3 To Calibrate for Thick 2 3 4 Default Output Profiles and Calibration Sets 6 8 6 1 4 Confirmation of Calibration Result 0 0 0 cccccccceceeeeeseeesseseeeeeeesesaeeeseeeeeeeess 6 13 6 1 5 To Calibrate Measurement Page Target in Both Directions 00 6 19 6 2 To Use Different Profile for Each Media When Media Types are Mixed 6 22 6 3 To Print in Desired Color Balance How to Use Color Editor 6 25 6 4 To Print with Profile Attached to IM aQe cccceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeeens 6 30 6 4 To Print with Profile Attached to IM aQe cccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaeeeens 6 31 6 5 To Adjust Tone of Gray or Black Area cccccceececseeeeeeeeeeea
50. an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Change the Contrast option in the Image Attribute tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast 4 C O Onn 4 4 Brightness lt a Background Adjustment 4 O l Kl Saturation 0 4 i Use Sharpness Filter A E 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 31 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GEE This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Contrast option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Contrast 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Contrast Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO i o Presets Standard HH Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan Magenta Image Attribute Sharpness Brightness PDF Preview Cancel Print Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 32 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 10 To Obtain a Sharper Print Image Print data ead es hee ii imaad da aks h i a ai al p r A ARRE Unadjusted settings The edge
51. and text in the Format AutoShape dialog box with transparency selected on Microsoft Office may be blurred e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 41 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 13 To Eliminate Smudges from Highly Colored Text and Lines To prevent toner scattering around text and lines where a large amount of toner is used Before the adjustment After the adjustment Let s sdicarxeor ih wise jiamai A iir o ine Beery foes in a pi TE the papiri col Black text looks smudged due to toner Smudges are eliminated scattering around the text Explanation When highly colored text and lines where a large amount of toner is used created on raster data image such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF are printed the text and lines look smudged due to toner scattering around the text and lines Adjust the sharpness intensity or the amount of toner used in order to obtain a clearer print image lt Hint gt If smudged text and lines appear on the print image in PDF format on Adobe Reader unmark the Print as image checkbox to print out the image If the Print as image checkbox is marked text and lines will be printed as raster data bitmap image and may be smudged Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can perform the adjustment for Windows Only the service technician can
52. automatically decrease the image density and reduce the amount of toner used Adjust the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode in order to obtain the desired image density requested by a particular user LJ Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 71 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 _Ps3 _ XPS EMED E 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value to adjust the image density in the toner save mode The 05 code to use varies depending on whether to adjust the image quality on Full Color or Twin Color printing or on Black and White printing Use either of the procedures below corresponding to the type of original to print To adjust the image quality in Full Color or Twin Color printing Auto Color or Twin Color is selected from among the Color options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS printer driver Auto Color or Twin Color is selected from among the Color Type options on Macintosh The Color options are available in the Basic tab on the PCL6 PS3 and XPS printer drivers The Color Type options are available in the Color Settings 1 menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh a Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for code 8160 to adjust the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScri
53. by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 35 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Before the adjustment After the adjustment YAY Li l d Se Mery ag ae Tr a ia yee Pra p a Moir occurs on the photo image Moir is eliminated and a clear copy image is obtained Explanation When an original containing photo images or gradational images halftones is copied moir sometimes occurs on the copy Perform adjustment regarding image processing sharpness intensity in order to obtain a clear copy image while eliminating moir Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to
54. changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure PCL6 Ps3 xPs J This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Wf 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Adjust the color balance e Use steps a to b to adjust the color balance a Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in image contrast b Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8054 to 8057 or 8062 to 8065 or 8046 to 8049 to adjust the color balance and increase the color density e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 52 3 Printer specific Adjustments Ex e When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type Presentation Halftone Detail gt Change the values for Y 05 8062 M 05 8063 C 05 8064 and K 05 8065 e When printing on Macintosh is with the following option selected Image Type Line Art Halftone Auto gt Change the values for Y 05 8054 M 05 8055 C 05 8056 and K 05 8057 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Color to
55. decrease a resolution or if moir still occurs even in a lower resolution use other procedures i M 3 When scanning press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Adjust the sharpness intensity e Press the button on the indicator to increase the sharpness intensity or the button to decrease it The sharpness intensity is set to the center by default If moir occurs by default press the button to decrease the sharpness intensity After adjusting the sharpness intensity scan and store the original Then print and check the print image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the minimum if moir still occurs use other procedures Wy 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7430 to 7433 and 8335 to 8337 to adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions This adjustment will have an effect only on an image stored in the Full color mode or the Gray scale mode TO Acceptable OO mode 05 code Recommended value 2ScePtable T petaun Full color Gay sae Pe T0743 Set a value smaller than 128 0 to 255 128 Text Photo 05 7430 Text 05 7431 Photo 05 7432 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Precautions after the completion of the adjustment When the original containing text and lines is scanned and printed the adjustment may possibly cause the blurred text and lines or a blend of undesired col
56. for code 7630 to adjust the threshold value in the Auto color mode As the set value is increased the original will be more likely to be recognized as black and white On the other hand if the value is decreased it will be more likely to be recognized as full color Acceptable Threshold when an original is placed on the original glass or when the RADF is used ee 0 to 255 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e When a non standard sized original is copied an area outside the original or the original cover may also be scanned This may prevent the original size from being accurately detected If the original cover is soiled the type of original cannot be accurately detected Therefore instruct the users to clean the original cover on a routine basis once a week e After the threshold in the Auto color mode is adjusted based on a particular type of original other types of original may not be correctly detected Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking whether any type of original is correctly detected e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 63 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 To Adjust the Twin Color Copy Image Quality Before the adjustment After the adjustment Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate C
57. have difficulty to select the correct setting items on the printer driver menu To create a proper ICC profile with the correct print image the suitable setting items must be selected Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings E 1 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select the paper type on the Paper Type option on the Basic tab menu Printing Preferences Paper Handling Print Job B Normal Print E ire E X fsa r os Settings Profile None Save Profile Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C Original Paper Size ED eter 8172x 11 Print Paper Size Image Scale A Same as Original Size i ni hy Paper Source Auto Z Paper Type Plain Be Transparency Thick 1 Back Thick 2 Back Thick 3 Back Thick 4 Back Special 1 Back Special 2 Back f Landscape 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 104 3 Printer specific Adjustments Image Quality Type E Mormal Frint Settings Setting 1 Profile Setting 2 None Save Profile E G Select the desired type of halftone on the Halftone option on the Basic tab menu It is not recommended to select Auto on this option because several types of halftone may be used on the same page Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Custom Color Settings
58. image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 22 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 6 To Eliminate the Background Color Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHART B 1 Function Autosi ponas Cantal ATHE TOSHIMi TIMES HOW MANY DINOSAURS DOYOU KNOW The background color of the original is also The background color is eliminated allowing copied Therefore no clear contrast is made clear contrast between the background and text between the background and text Explanation When a full color original such as colored paper is copied its background color is also copied Therefore no clear contrast is made between the background and the text on the copy Perform background adjustment in order to copy an original with a highly colored background while eliminating the background color or making it white Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode or the Full color mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights r
59. is necessary the service technician must perform the next step 0 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7975 7976 or 7983 to adjust the density level of the black logos adjust ed value value range K 05 7975 Set a value Black 05 7976 larger than 0 to 255 128 05 7983 128 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highly or deeply colored area such as in a photo to become blurred on the copy Also it may also cause offset failure grained images and degradation in gradation Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 50 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 11 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effecti
60. is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure particularly when a highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode Also it may cause degradation in the color reproducibility Excessively enhancing the tint of black makes other colors such as skin tones look dull Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 14 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 4 To Copy in Vivid Colors Before the adjustment After the adjustment When a copy is made without any adjustments The copy image is obtained in vivid colors the vividness is insufficient on the copy image Explanation When a copy i
61. needs of all customers Proper image quality adjustments can satisfy such needs Most of the adjustments described in this manual must be performed by a service technician but a few of them can also be performed by the customer It is strongly recommended that this manual be fully utilized by not only the service technician but also the sales representative who also has opportunities of obtaining customer feedback on the image quality This manual helps the sales representative to study and comprehend what kind of customer requirements for image quality can be satisfied to make proposals to customers to improve image quality and to communicate the customers specific requirements with ease to the service technician In addition this manual is expected to facilitate the marketing of Toshiba MFPs to prospective customers that have a specific demand for image quality and the expansion of sales The adjustments described in this manual are all based on the requests of actual customers Meeting their specific wishes will only add to their satisfaction Please remember to read Precautions after the completion of the adjustment to which you must pay close attention after finishing the adjustment Precautions in Servicing e For adjustments to be performed by the service technician the precautions given in the Service Manual must be stringently followed The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has complete
62. only the printouts but also every type of image quality such as the copy image Therefore perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular LJ Remarks The saturation adjustment does not affect black or gray areas on the printout e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 29 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 9 To Easily Adjust the Overall Contrast Before the adjustment The image is printed with a natural contrast Default printing After the adjustment After the adjustment The contrast is decreased The contrast is increased Explanation The contrast of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the Contrast option on the printer driver e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 30 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Wf 1 Change the Contrast option on the printer driver e Select the desired value for contrast on a scale of 4 Lowest to 4 Highest For Windows XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have
63. original in JPEG or PDF Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause blurred text noise or vary the hues of areas Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 11 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 5 To Sharply Scan the Original To increase the sharpness intensity Before the adjustment After the adjustment The image looks too soft and blurred The edges are enhanced The image looks sharp Explanation Adjust the sharpness intensity in order to sharply scan the soft and blurred original This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes Full color Gray scale Black and Auto color e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 12 5 Scanning specific Adjustments Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use p
64. other than colored pages that cannot be omitted the service technician must perform the procedure below e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 83 2 Copier specific Adjustments Eo N 2 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel Then press or of OMIT BLANK PAGE ADJUSTMENT E I Ii y 3 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 7618 to adjust the threshold for judging the original as blank pages e The larger the setting value is the more the original tends to be judged as a blank page 05 code Recommended value Acceptable range value Default 05 7618 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 Set the value in increments of approximately 15 until the optimum value is obtained while checking if proper originals are judged as a blank page Q Caution after the adjustment e When the threshold for judging blank pages is changed the same threshold for in the network scanning function is also changed e Originals with a small portion of small letters may be judged as a blank page Therefore adjust the value carefully while checking the copy image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 84 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 21 To Obtain Image in Even Density Level Original After the adjustment TECHIE COE POST CHAET S I TO aa x a a a ME ji ve at Rh a
65. perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image Remarks When scanning the original use the following steps to change the default indicator position in the background adjustment option which is displayed on the Control Panel a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the Next button twice to display the screen to change the default values in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode e Select the default background density in the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT option e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 4 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 3 To Clearly Scan and Print an Original in Black and White To improve gradation and reduce graininess Before the adjustment After the adjustment If the original is scanned in the Black mode The halftones of the scanned in image are the halftones may become blurred in black clearly printed out Explanation If an original is scanned in the Black mode a difference in the density level of the halftones cannot be accurately scanned As a result it may become blurred in black or grained Scan a black and white original in the Gray scale mode in order to scan and print it out in black and white more clearly LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments 1
66. po When the value increases the white void around the scanned image becomes wider and the data on the image decrease e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 21 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance Calibration Before the adjustment After the adjustment The color balance varies according to a The color balance is constantly maintained change in the environment or a lapse of time Explanation Color balance varies with a change in the use environment replacement of the consumables and so forth Therefore a periodic adjustment of the color reproducibility calibration is needed in order to maintain a steady color balance on printouts Calibration in this section indicates that calibration for both a printer engine in the MFP and the Fiery Printer Controller GA 1211 Calibration is a basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on printouts If you would like to accurately reproduce the intended hue or when you have replaced consumables or changed the installation environments be sure to perform calibration to ensure the accurate color reproducibility e STUDIO2330C 2820C 2830C 3520C 3530C 4520C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 1 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the
67. print image is obtained L Explanation The brightness of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the Brightness setting on the printer driver e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 23 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Mf 1 Change the Brightness option on the printer driver e Select the desired value for brightness on a scale of 4 Darkest to 4 Lightest For Windows XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Change the Brightness option in the Image Attribute tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast 1 eo E Brightness TO oo 4 4 Background Adjustment 4 m n Saturation ooo oa We Use Sharpness Filter 4 0 4 Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 9224 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GEYER This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Brightness option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feat
68. quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 71 2 Copier specific Adjustments E U I 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7025 7075 to 7764 or 7766 to adjust the reproducibility of the background when using the RADF ee Recommended Acceptable Full Color Auto color Auto color when judged as black Text 05 7675 a Eevee Set 128 or larger 0 to 255 128 Hsr custom custom Photo smoothing Monocolor AU 05 7766 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Correctly adjusting the installation heights of the MFP and the RADF is a prerequisite to perform this adjustment Therefore perform all the necessary adjustments Only if further adjustment is still desired for the reproducibility of background should this adjustment be performed e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 72 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 18To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings To Use Custom Mode Explanation Five original modes Text Photo Text Printed image Photo and Map are available for the color modes and four original modes Text Photo Text Photo and Image smoothing are avai
69. still necessary use the next procedure E 0 I WZ 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SOFT button to soften the copy image After softening the copy image copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step E I I 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7056 to 7058 7249 7795 to 7800 and 7795 to 7809 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize the edges of the image Accepta value range Set a value smaller Black than 128 0 to 255 28 to 127 var Autocolor Text Photo 05 7806 Seta value smaller Text Photo Photo Set a value smaller when judged than 128 0 to 255 as black 28 to 127 fp text Photo 05 7736 To p 05 7797 05 7798 Set a value smaller Full color ed iage than 128 0 to 255 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 44 2 Copier specific Adjustments The smaller the setting value is the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes The larger the setting value is the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensi
70. system administrator can use all the procedures All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Perform automatic calibration for the printer engine in the MFP For procedures for automatic calibration refer to procedure 2 in 3 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance 2 Perform calibration for the GA 1211 For procedures for calibration refer to 6 1 1 and subsequent sections 6 1 1 To Check Calibration History Explanation Check the image quality of printed images e g test charts or images printed from a computer and calibration history in order to judge the necessity of calibration There are two methods to check the day that calibration was performed one is to print the Configuration Page and another is to start the Calibrator of client and check what is displayed in the Media field on Calibration Set when the desired media type is placed Or you can print a PS test chart for checking image quality However on the PS test chart you can check calibration history only for plain paper and cannot check the one for thick paper or special paper while it is convenient for checking actual images To check printed images for media types other than plain paper print the desired image on a media type to be checked and then check visually if the color balance is satisfactory Calibrator DERK Standard Expert 1 Select Measurement Method 3
71. the number of steps moved may not be detected even if the user moves the indicator on the touch panel To adjust gamma balance in medium and high density areas a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 7276 to adjust the gamma balance in each of medium and high density areas mode range value Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Note that gradations density level in the medium and high density areas may be reversed with some setting values Subcodes to be entered differ depending on the target density area Refer to the table below to enter the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted a E l Medium density area High density area e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 76 2 Copier specific Adjustments To make background lighter a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7279 and 7280 to make the background lighter Density Acceptable 05 7279 pgo SlBorlmger owas 128 Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained L Cautions after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 77 2 Copier specific Adjustment
72. the copy image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the following procedures Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7056 to 7058 and 7806 to 7809 to make the copied text darker sharpness level increases e The code to use varies according to the original mode Text Photo Text or Photo Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the original mode in which you would like to improve the image quality and set values larger than 128 Original mode 05 code Value valuerange Text Photo Text Photo Image smoothing Auto color when Di e lat Eres Set a a A than 0 to 255 Auto color when os l judged as black 05 7807 Text Auto color when judged as black 05 7808 Photo Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image the MAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance 1f the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C
73. the original mode options To have Custom in the Black mode select the existing original mode option as reference original mode To have Custom in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode selected select the existing original mode or e document mode option where the value has been adjusted to identify whiteout areas as reference original mode This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Black mode or the Full color mode including the Auto color mode LJ Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Only the service technician must use procedures 1 and 2 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 3 EI 1 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 7401 or 8303 to select reference original mode for Custom mode from among the original mode options e Select the original mode option which is most likely to be matched with the image quality the user desires For the Black mode pO Reserved Default Text Photo For the Full color mode pO Reserved Default a pd Primtedimage SS Photo S o o Poo Pa edocument After selecting the reference original mode option use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 18 5 Scanning specific Adjustments BY P 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 to adjust the values in the Custom m
74. to 7192 and 7956 to 7959 to adjust the gamma balance in each of medium and high density areas ae Recommended Acceptable Default Auto color when judged as black 05 7957 Text Photo ea ee 0 to 255 than 128 Auto color when judged as black 05 7958 Text Auto color when judged as black 05 7959 Photo Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Please be careful because the gradation or density of the medium density area may exceed that of the high density area depending on the set value The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The density of light text or a graphic image will vary if the medium or high density area is mainly adjusted Setting 0 for the subcode allows you to adjust the low density area But it will not affect the light text or graphic images Therefore never change the value for the low density area Area where the density is adjusted C a l Medium density area High density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used moir blurred text small dark text blurred diminished photo images or gradational images less accurate reproducibility of halftones Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checkin
75. to increase the density Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the scanned in image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Gradation in the Black mode will vary if the medium density area is mainly adjusted But remember that adjusting the low or high density area will rarely affect the gradation in the Black mode Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 17 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 8 To Register the Original Mode Optimal for a Particular Type of Original To have Custom selected Explanation If the value for 05 code is adjusted in existing original mode Text Photo Text Photo Printed image Photo or Gray scale in order to clearly scan a particular type of original other types of original may not be clearly scanned In this case add the original mode option adjusted for a particular type of original as Custom User custom mode To have Custom selected add the value adjusted for 05 code in Custom mode to the one in reference original mode Select reference original mode for Custom from among
76. toner will be stabilized by changing the value for 08 2677 from 0 OFF to 1 ON However long time usage affects the life of consumables It is recommended to make a minimal change amount or to return to the default value immediately 2 The image density or color during continuous printing on the plain paper can be stabilized by changing the fusing related settings by means of the following procedures Q Procedures Follow the procedure below a Change the parameter of 08 5241 0 Temperature correction in ready status heat roller at normal temperatures to 0 default 2 0 deg C and reduce the set temperature by 10 deg C b Change the parameter of 08 5241 1 Temperature correction in ready status pressure roller at normal temperatures to 0 default 2 0 deg C and reduce the set temperature by 10 deg C c Change the parameter of 08 5308 1 Pre running time for the first printing plain paper at normal temperatures color to 9 default 0 Invalid and extend the pre running time for the first printing by 10 sec d Change the parameter of 08 5310 1 Applicable period of pre running time for the first printing to 0 default 8 10 min and change the setting of Pre running for the first printing to Always use Pre running for the first printing means the idling rotation of the Fuser Unit prior to printing lt Notes gt e Confirm if the firmware version is the latest one before the setting If no
77. used for the adjustment e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 63 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing E 4 Increase the values for codes 7315 to 7320 to adjust the gamma curve balance and increase the Low Medium density on Black and White mode printing e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below value range aa 05 7315 0 1 2 05 7316 0 1 2 PCL6 e A Oe A Seravae areer tns 016955 128 05 7318 0 1 2 XPS 05 7319 0 1 2 05 7320 0 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Halftone option For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL and Detail is changed it will be applied to pri
78. you re shopping for your perfect honeymoon destination or just looking for a special getaway our top destination picks for romance offer beauty relaxation and plenty of activities for just the two of you Our members chose these five cites as the best Venice B Pesults based on a survey o lailwind Premier members TOSHIBA 2 11 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text Logo Highly Colored After the adjustment Our Top Five Romantic Destinations Whether you re shopping for your perfect honeymoon destination or just looking for a special getaway our top destination picks for romance offer beauty relaxation and plenty of activities for just the two of you Our members chose these five cites as the best San Jose Del Cabo Jamaica St Lucia 18 3 B Results based on a survey of lailwind Premier members TOSHIBA The solid filled graph is not highly colored The solid filled graph becomes highly colored enough and sharper Explanation Solid filled bold text such as a logo is sometimes not highly colored on the copy Change the original mode option perform copy density adjustment and level adjustment for black headline text in order to make the solid filled image more highly colored This adjustment will have an effect only on copying in the Full color mode Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality of a black or colored logo Refer to the procedure correspondin
79. 0 to specify the best interval during which image quality control should be performed according to use of the MEP The MFP is installed in a place where the temperature and humidity vary widely Set 1 value x 5 R H for code 08 2505 to increase the frequency of image quality control in response to a change in humidity Image quality control will be performed when the relative humidity changes in accordance with the specified difference from the previous image quality control If the difference in the relative humidity exceeds the specified value image quality control is performed first Then a copy or print job will be performed Value for 08 2505 Difference in relative humidity ae ae l S R H 10 R H default b Set 5 or 3 for code 08 2508 to increase the frequency of image quality control in response to a change in humidity Image quality control will be performed when the drum temperature changes in accordance with the difference from the previous image quality control If the difference in the drum temperature exceeds the specified value after a print job is performed image quality control is performed Value for 08 2508 Difference in drum temperature ry ee ee ee 3 3 C T C default e After setting the value for code 08 2505 forcibly perform image quality control as follows Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C
80. 0 sheets 1000 1000 sheets default Value for 08 9199 Accumulated number of printed sheets before image quality control is performed 50 to 499 50 to 499 sheets 500 sheets default lt Notes gt e To ensure stability it is recommended to set 1 3 to 1 5 of the number of continuous printing though the printing performance deteriorates e Since the life of consumables such as the cleaning blade is affected do not set to less than 50 sheets for 08 2509 and 08 9199 e The image stability will be improved by changing the setting However long time usage affects the life of consumables It is recommended to make a minimal change amount or to return to the default value immediately e If 08 2367 ON OFF setting of drum and belt reverse rotation amount control is set to 0 there is no effect because image control is not performed even with a printing interruption and any setting number of 08 2509 and 08 9199 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 19 Ei M a 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box The image quality needs to be constantly maintained after the equipment has been unused for a long time After the equipment has been unused for a long time change the value for 08 2677 from 0 OFF to 1 ON to stabilize the developer material and the image quality lt Notes gt The developer material will be stirred and the tribo charge of the
81. 05 Recommended Acceptable Default Suse PDL Halftone dade Subcode P000 aua value range g o i aa Seta value larger g tg255 128 c than 128 Cai K Black Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained The value for 05 code for K black will affect black and white images including text lines and photos on the printout The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Whether to fix or change the maximum density in a high density area can be selected by the setting of 05 8066 Area where the density is Low density area Medium density area High density area 0 The maximum color density in a high gt density area is fixed 1 The maximum color density in a high density area is changed lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Detail is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Detail or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will b
82. 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 17 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box To Have Uniform Variations in the Image Quality after Return from the Auto Power Save Mode Change the value of the 08 code 2507 to change the conditions for starting image quality control shorten the period of time the MFP is left unused after the MFP was recovered from the auto power save mode so that the image quality control will be easily performed SEN N resumed resumed resumed resumed resumed resumed 2 E resumed resumed er resumed a resumed resumed 7 150 minutes or longer default value image quality control is performed before the paused job is resumed resumed resumed resumed resumed lt Note gt Do not disable the Auto shut off mode timer setting 0 is set for 08 9112 while the Auto power save timer setting is set to invalid 0 is set for 08 9111 If both settings are set to invalid this equipment does not enter the energy saving mode so it is always in the ready status Due to this image quality control according to the period of time the MFP is left unused is not performed regardless of the setting value of 08 2507 e After setting the value for code 08 2507 forcibly perform image quality control as follows Enter adjustment mode 05 select code 2742 and then press the START button e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C
83. 5 Change the values for codes 7056 to 7058 7249 7795 to 7800 and 7806 to 7809 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Increasing the sharpness intensity will enhance the edges of the image Accepta Color mode Original mode 05 code FADSORME IRIE ble value value range Set a value larger Black than 128 0 to 255 128 129 to 228 Jiel Full color than 128 0 to 255 Photo 129 to 228 C Map 05 7800 Autocolor Text Photo 05 7806 Seta value larger larger when judged 05 7807 than 128 0 to 255 128 as black 05 7808 129 to 228 The smaller the setting value is the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes The larger the setting value is the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the MAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance 1f the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper However the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from 100 to 100 of the total of the setting value of the adjustment code and that of the indicator For instance
84. 540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 19 2 Copier specific Adjustments i I 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for the following codes below to adjust the density level of the background The highlighted area will become highly visible if the background density is increased Acceptab Color mode Original mode 05 code ieoi Ee le value value range Full color Auto color 05 7056 when judged as color 05 7657 dis Printed Image 05 7658 05 7659 Set 127 or smaller Full color 05 7660 05 7661 Auto color when judged as black lt Automatic adjustment gt Auto color when judged as black lt Manual adjustment gt Black lt Automatic adjustment gt 05 7044 0 to 255 128 smoothing 05 7279 05 7041 05 7042 Set 128 or larger Black 05 7048 2 lt Manual adjustment gt 05 7049 smoothing Mono color 05 7758 05 7759 Twin color 05 7760 Printed Image 05 7761 and 2 are common settings e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 20 2 Copier specific Adjustments To make another adjustment of the background for Full color after the above adjustment Adjust the density level while checking the color balance since it may differ from that of the original after the adjustment ar Recommended Acceptable orara mode slcoae ane Relais Pa Full color Auto color when judged as color lt Automatic a
85. 540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 44 3 Printer specific Adjustments 2 Change the Background adjustment option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver and press Setting button in the Image Quality tab And then set the Background Adjustment option in the Image Attribute tab within the range of 1 to 4 Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast A oo A Brightness lt E o a Background Adjustment Saturation Dt i Use Sharpness Filter A 0 J Restore Defaults Cancel Help Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The adjustment in procedure 1 may possibly provide insufficient photo contrast images Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 45 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 14 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text Before the adjustment Be Relocation Issues and Trends Relocation Issues and Trends E Country A E Country A E Country B E Country B E Country E Country E Country D E Country D 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 2044 2045 2046 2047 2048 2049 2050 Relocation to higher ground depends on clima
86. AN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options Perform this adjustment only if a black and white original containing no photo images is scanned or if degradation in the photo image quality is acceptable This adjustment will be effective only if TEXT PHOTO or PHOTO is initially selected from among the original mode options This adjustment will have an effect only on an image scanned in the Black mode After changing original mode scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select HIGH from among the compression rate options MID is selected from among the compression rate options by default This adjustment will have an effect only on an image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode After changing the compression rate scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 9 7 5 Scanning specific Adjustments OU WE y 4 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the q button to dec
87. Apply to Pure Gray Auto x Apply to W Black Overprint eee Caie PostScnpt Overprint Restore Detaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 17 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Black Auto from among the Pure Black and Gray options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Pure Black and Gray 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Pure Black and Gray Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO BE Presets Standard Color Settings 1 Color Type Color HH Halftone Auto HH Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type General HH Black Over Print Text and Graphics Pure Black and Gray Black Auto Preview Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment allows gray areas always to be reproduced using all color toners C M Y and K As a result undesired colors may look blended depending on the print image Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 18 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 6 To U
88. Auto color black lt Manual density adjustment gt 1 and 2 are common settings Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 24 2 Copier specific Adjustments 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7190 to 7192 to adjust the gamma balance in each of low and medium density areas Original Acceptable ode 05 code Recommended value 05 7190 05 7191 Set a value smaller than 128 0 to 255 128 05 7192 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The background density will vary if the low or medium density area is mainly adjusted Setting 2 for the subcode allows you to adjust the high density area But it will not affect the background density Therefore never change the value for the high density area Area where the density is adjusted Oo 0 Low density area Medium density area After adjusting the gamma curve balance copy and check the
89. Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles AGB Source Profile ed Printer s Default Y CMYK Source Protile Printer s Default Y Apply to Device Color Only Protile Ss Destination Profile Printer s Default Rendering Intent Printer s Default Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Cancel Help E I 7 Print a color measurement patch to be used on the ICC profile creation software E 8 Create the ICC profile following the operational procedure provided by the ICC profile creation software Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks e Read the precautions provided by the ICC profile creation software carefully before starting printing e The correct image may not be printed on some paper types that are out of the MFP s specifications e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 107 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 25 2 To Print Precise Colors Using Existing RGB Source ICC Profiles Explanation Some users use standard RGB color space ICC profiles that are disclosed and distributed by some websites when they print RGB images in their computers with RGB color space which matches with one of the ICC profiles they obtained from the website This method is used for example when photo images must be printed with Adobe RGB color space Nam
90. DF or TIFF file and then moved using the File Downloader the image quality may be diminished However you can use Archive Document or Backup to move the data while maintaining the image quality The Backup feature can also collectively backs up all the data in the e Filing box Note that files created through the Archive Document or Backup feature cannot be directly opened on the PC or printed out For further information regarding Archive Document and Backup refer to the e Filing Guide e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 13 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 7 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or Image Editing Before the adjustment After the adjustment i 5 i Copy to Box l Scan to Box Print data RGB data e Filing box e Filing box Downloaded Downloaded Converted into RGB RGB data Client PC Client PC Stored and Stored and edited LS edited Displayed on the Displayed on the computer monitor computer monitor RGB data RGB data When the original is stored by Copy to Box it The original is stored as RGB data by Scan to will be converted into RGB data while being Box This can avoid unnecessary data downloaded to a PC This may diminish the conversion As a result the image quality can image quality be maintained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 14 4 e Filing spec
91. Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab and then press the Edit button e Set the value for the Low Medium density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of 1 to 4 in the Color Balance Details option This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6 PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver Initially set 4 and check the printout Color Balance Detail a ao F r a a y S k oh X mast a a T r Restore Defaults Cancel After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 84 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 Ps3 xPs EFI This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing My 6 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8042 to 8065 to adjust the color density Color balance e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type General Halftone Auto gt Text area graphic area and image area Change the values for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 C 05 8060 and K 05 8061 e When printi
92. Ei MA G1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in density After exercising image quality control use the next procedure Ei i EW 2 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But USER can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 1 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box To adjust the copy image quality Use steps a through 1 to perform automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter the 6 to 10 digit administrator password Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the COPY button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning an
93. F If the original is scanned in Slim PDF the image quality may be further diminished e Complicated originals such as tables or maps containing lines or small sized text e Originals where stable image quality is required such as critical documents HM 1 When scanning the original press the SLIM PDF button on the Control Panel After adjusting the original in Slim PDF scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If the image quality adjustment in Slim PDF is necessary use the next procedure i Mi 2 Adjust the image quality in Slim PDF at a user s request To reduce the blurred area of text and photos Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Turn the original and place it Or when scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Change the Image Rotation option to turn the original After changing the Image Rotation option scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 10 5 Scanning specific Adjustments b Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for code 9104 and 9107 to adjust the image quality and resolution of a background 05 code ie i Acceptable value range Default 05 9104 05 9107 Changing the value provides the effects bel
94. HR 1 A E TOSHEA COLOR CHART Ha Tee THR a A Black is not dark enough compared to the Black is enhanced and closely matched with original the original hue Explanation When a full color original is scanned black is not dark enough compared to the original In general the scanned in image is likely to become less dark Finely adjust the black density of the scanned in image in order to darken black and closely match it with the original hue This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 14 5 Scanning specific Adjustments LJ Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments M 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8315 to 8317 to adjust the black density of a scanned in image ee Acceptable color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable T petaun 05 8315 Full color 05 8316 Set a value larger than 0 0 to 4 05 8317 Setting 0 provides the lightest black while setting 4 the darkest Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly provide the extremely dark background Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rig
95. IO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 117 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 3 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting rea Deratinn Drafaranrar Ve Paper Handing Image Quality Image Quality Type E Mormal Print J Profile Name Settings Setting 1 Profile Setting 2 None Save Profile Restore Defaults Setting o E 4 Select the uploaded profile on RGB Source Profile or CMYK Source Profile on the Advanced tab menu a CMYK Source Profile as Printer s Default I Apply to Device Color Only Protile Destination Profile Printer s Default Rendering Intent i Printers Default Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update How Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 118 E II 5 Uncheck Apply to Device Color Only Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles AGB Source Profile a oa Printer s Default ki a CMYK Source Profile CE Printer s Default Apply to Device Color Only Profile 4 Destination Profile Printer s Default Rendering Intent Printer s Default Perceptual Relative
96. Image Attribute tab To make a smoother image check its checkbox and then set the value within a range of 1 to 4 e Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest print image Setting Basic Color Balance mage Attribute Contrast 1 _ z_ _ _ _ _ _ E 4 i Brightness 4 3 4 F 4 gt Background Adjustment 1 0 E E El Saturation a DI ji Use Sharpness Filter Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 40 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GET This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 e Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest print image The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Sharpness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO H p Presets Standard Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan Magenta T PDF Preview LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment provides a soft or blurred image in general Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Especially text and lines on the background of a gradational image
97. Lines Toner Save Black Over Print Text and Graphics B Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto HH T PDFw Preview Cancel Print Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks e Setting a color space to sRGB is a prerequisite to maximize the effectiveness of this adjustment Therefore if the monitor does not support sRGB or if color management cannot be performed the effectiveness of the adjustment may be significantly lost e In general it is impossible to reproduce color saturation closely matching the true colors as viewed on the monitor because the range of colors reproducible in toner colors is narrower than the one on the monitor e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 15 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 5 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue To maintain Consistency in Gray among Text Photos and Graphics Before the adjustment After the adjustment Photo area l j Photo area Text area Fe Wa Text area TOSHIBA TOSHIBA How gray is reproduced varies depending on All color toners are used to reproduce gray the type of original As a result there are As a result consistency is maintained in the variations in gray gray hue Explanation For printing only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray areas of drawing data lines and text On the other hand all color toners C M Y
98. ON All rights reserved 6 27 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 9 Change the name of the file moved to the hold queue to CALIB PS The media type and page size must be set in advance because they are not linked 60 0 Command WorkStation Servers 4 Job Center Device Center CA 1211 D6 Logged in as Administrator Switch User an Ti Frint Properties Preview Delete Calibrate Logs Paper Catalog GA 1211 D6 i AA TeOAS CNFP Printing Job Status Jub Title User Size Nurt Copies Media Type Page Size Processing Cancel Jeb Status Job Title Size Numb Copies Media Type Page Size bis i Se ee ee eee ee ee eee eee Printed 10 Archived 0 Numb Copies Date Time Media Type Page Size Callb ps adimninist 1 3 MB a Today 14 36 58 Consumables Drawer 1 Aa R Plain Plain Paper Drawer 2 A A3 Plain Plain Paper Large Ca acity Feeder Ad ain Plain Paper i Bypass Tray _ L Custom Plain Plain Paper e m e a a r e e e e e e e e a e a a a a a a rg e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 28 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 10 Adjust the curve for each color with Color Editor and then click Test Print Then check Sample Image Page on the Test Print dialog box You can leave Comparison Page unchecked if not necessary Then click Print to print the CALIB PS file in the hold queue R
99. ORPORATION All rights reserved 3 79 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 20 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing Before the adjustment After the adjustment Excursions A blank page is also delivered A blank page is ignored for printing Explanation Some applications may be designed to automatically insert blank pages for laying out the pages of a document Change the option on the printer driver in order to ignore all blank pages for printing LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 76 E I Enable the Do not Print Blank Pages option on the printer driver For Windows tab Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Templates Print Job Default Menu Setting EE E Mormal Pririt E fiai eee f Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Made W SNMP Communication SNMP Settings Output Devices Add Printer Custom Paper Size User name Alas U ser001 z E l Department Code Profile None kd Custom Settings File Import Export Save Profile Delete Restore All Defaults Version Information Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 77 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Open the print dialog box Enable the Do not Print Blank Pages
100. OSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 4 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance Before the adjustment After the adjustment The natural color balance is obtained The desired color balance is obtained Ex Yellowness is enhanced L Explanation If you would like to change the color balance or darkness of the printouts and reproducibility of halftones in accordance with a type of original or the user s requirements change the Image Quality Type option on the printer driver or adjust the color balance LJ Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 5 3 Printer specific Adjustments Wj 1 Change the Image Quality Type option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Change the Image Quality Type option in the Image Quality tab Print Job Z Normal Frint 3E Photograph Presentation Line Art l Advanced LOO O Sets ee Protile Setting 2 Mone E Save Frofile Delete Restore Defaults Setting 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2040C
101. PORATION All rights reserved 2 18 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 5 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper To improve the highlight reproducibility After the adjustment Before the adjustment The splashing area highlight is blurred A clear copy image of the splashing area is obtained Explanation Perform the copy density adjustment and background adjustment in order to make the pale area highlight of the original look darker and sharper on the copy Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 4 M WZ 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the DARK button to darken the background After increasing the background density copy and check the copy image quality With the background density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4
102. RATION All rights reserved 3 58 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 15 To Make the Light Colored Area Darker on the Printout Before the adjustment National Use Internet use will be boosted worldwide The availability of advanced lelecormruncations is also expected to tuel explosive growth in regions D and E The launch of the Bth communications will alse add a significant capability in terms of providing universal ACCES Internet Growth to 2090 BE re a ae Ty he map oe E D aadi a wel in poi aT and a polar eg and in Bp Bn parere Trest in countries hai implernenied internet infrasinsctuna carty on all recommerily bo sire eh mee demographics sii widen fo incode apphcebord tor precios cheddar Pare dor Tike cir ao Ther er The ae a Se After the adjustment National Use Internet use will be boosted worldwide The availability of advanced telecommunmications ts also expected to fuel explosive growth in regions D and E The launch of the 8th communications satellite will also add a significant capability in terms of providing universal access Internet Growth to 2090 The raene s epad 10 CEPENONCe ONEA YI A BA a eas opto TOL MeCatED r hena m E D angl awal im bonen and pah poa repons and in epece Staten Commmuriies Grosth in countries that implerterted internet infrastuctre early on wil necessarty be slower sthough weer demographics atl wider fo nade appicators tor preschool chidren ih Dearg eevee Weeder Temun lee
103. SHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 21 2 Copier specific Adjustments a 4 Enter adjustment mode aerate Change the values for codes 7960 to 7979 to adjust the color density to Acceptable a st Original mode mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Default eee Magenta 128 to increase the ee ee es sae on Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the ean density Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is _Text Photo 05 7975 on K 05 7976 Black obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The density of the highlighted area will vary if the low or medium density area is mainly adjusted Setting 2 for subcode allows you to adjust the high density area But it will not affect the highlighted area Therefore never change the value for the high density area Area where the density is adjusted Oo 0 Low density area Medium density area LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly provide an excessively dark background Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy
104. TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 45 2 Copier specific Adjustments M WZ 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7889 to 7892 to adjust the maximum color density of text Acceptable Color to adjust 05 code Recommended value value rande Default Y Yellow 05 7889 M Set a value larger than 5 to Magenta 05 7890 increase the density C Cyan K Black 05 7891 Set a value smaller than 5 to decrease the density 05 7892 Set the value in increment of 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After adjusting the maximum color density of the text copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure I Z 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7840 and 7841 to adjust the level of reproducibility in the Text Photo mode or the User custom mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value 05 7840 Full color 05 7841 Set a value smaller than 3 ows 0 Set the value in increment of 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained First set 3 for this code and check the copy image If further image quality improvements are still necessary set 2 If even further improvements are still necessary set 1 for this code Remember that if a value larger than 3 is set the edges of the image are enhanced attaching importance to the repr
105. TOSHIBA Thinkin color Fstuno2040c 2540c 3040c 3540c 4540c Satisfying Specific Customer Needs for Designed Image Quality Imaging Manual ETT S F Trig oa y eal Pn J he u j oo 7 TT T Tee an i vao lt FO 3 era nge e File No SME11002600 R110621J9200 TTEC Ver00_ 2011 08 aeaa Tie Trademarks Fiery is a registered trademark of Electronics for Imaging Inc in the U S Patent and Trademark Office and or certain other foreign jurisdictions Company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION Revision Record File No SME11002600 Date Rev No ltem Descriptions Remarks C a a Purpose of the Imaging Manual The Imaging Manual is intended for customers using the Toshiba e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C with a variety of specific needs and inquiries for high image quality such as How to obtain a clearer copy image How to maintain the current image quality How to make the text look sharper on the copy The Toshiba MFPs are factory configured to provide image quality settings that satisfy the majority of customers However these settings may not be necessarily optimal for the specific
106. TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button again I 7 2 Perform saturation adjustment to adjust the overall saturation e Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the SATURATION button c Press the button to increase the saturation of the copy image d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the saturation copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure YW 3 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 4 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 16 2 Copier specific Adjustments IN W 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7960 to 7979 to adjust the color density Color to ye Acceptable Calorio Toriginat mode 5 rp Recommended valve APBD peta ie Magenta Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density 0 to 255 128 Text Photo 05 7975 01 2 K 05 7976 0 1 2 Black _Text Photo 05 7970 O 1 2_ Set a value smaller
107. The following resolution options are available as the default e Full color mode including Auto color mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e Gray scale mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e Black mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e Remember that when scanning the original in the Full color mode if the original mode option is switched from the Photo mode or the Printed image to the Text mode the file size may become larger e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 9 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 4 2 To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 The service technician must use only procedure 2 in adjustment mode 05 step b To reduce the blurred area of text and photos Both the service technician and the user can use other procedures lt Note gt Slim PDF will be available only if SCAN TO FILE OR USB or SCAN TO E MAIL is selected in scan mode to scan the original in the Full color mode or the Gray scale mode e The image quality or file size in Slim PDF may be more affected than in JPEG or PDF depending on the environment original placing direction when the original is scanned In addition the scanning will be slowed down e Slim PDF is not suitable for the following originals It is recommended to scan them in JPEG or PDF e Originals blurred when scanned in JPEG or PD
108. The user may want to select a compression rate depending on the type of original or purpose of the image stored In this case it is recommended to utilize the template Initially select the desired compression rate in the template and recall it as necessary This facilitates changing the compression rate on a job by job basis For further information regarding the template and its use refer to the Operator s Manual for Scanning Guide and TopAccess Guide To change the default compression rate Use steps a to d to change the default compression rate a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the HIGH button in the COMPRESS option LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Changing the default compression rate of the scanning functions will affect the quality of originals which will be stored in the Full color including the Auto color or the Gray scale mode Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Remarks If the full color or gray scale image 1s copied or printed and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box or Print to Box the user can select a desired compression rate when downloading the image using File Downloader on a client PC e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C
109. To Avoid Copying Blank Page of Original Scanned with RADF Before the adjustment After the adjustment Excursions Excursions When the original is scanned with the RADF The blank pages are omitted blank pages included in the original are also Explanation When the original is scanned with the RADF blank pages included in the original are also copied To copy while omitting the blank pages automatically the Blank Omit Pages function must be set and its threshold for judging if the page is blank or not must be adjusted However colored originals with no text or images are not omitted even this adjustment was performed because they cannot be detected as blank pages with this function Target originals e The back side of an original with dark images on its front side the dark images can be seen through the back side or an original with light color e An original with only 3 letters in 10 5 pt an original that is omitted as a blank page with the default setting Q Procedures You can start with any of the steps However it is recommended to perform the steps in order as listed below Both the service technician and the user can use step 1 and 2 Only the service technician can use step 3 BOY Press the EDIT tab on the touch panel and then press the OMIT BLANK PAGE button Then press the OK button to enable the Omit Blank Page function After the setting copy and check the image If there is any page
110. UDIO2040C 131 to 135 e STUDIO2540C 3040C 3540C e STUDIO2040C PAE 4540C 129 to 133 136 Set a value smaller than default 0 to 255 e STUDIO2040C 137 to 141 e STUDIO2540C Pattern B e STUDIO2540C 3040C 3540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 135 to 139 4540C 134 Set a value larger than default 05 4523 b After performing registration control print out the test print pattern to check whether the misaligned colors have been improved For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedures 3 and 4 Repeatedly use procedures 3 to 5 as necessary to select a proper value lt Hint gt When subcode 0 is adjusted for code 05 4523 the correlation between the paper feeding speed and rotating speed of the transfer belt will be corrected in every paper mode However when colors are misaligned on an image printed in the thick paper mode after the adjustment for subcode 0 adjust subcode 3 during deceleration in the thick paper mode For subcode 3 use the steps and recommended values for subcode 0 Paper for printing a test print pattern will only be fed from the drawer Load the desired number of sheets of thick paper in the drawer in order to print the test print pattern on thick paper Adjust subcode 0 and then subcode 3 in order to adjust only misaligned colors in the thick paper mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights res
111. UDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 3 5 Scanning specific Adjustments i WY 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8310 to 8312 to decrease the background density e The code to use varies according to color mode and original mode Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the color mode for which you would like to improve the image quality Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Default value range 05 8310 Full color 05 8311 Set a value smaller than 50 0 to 50 05 8312 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the scanned in image until the optimum value is obtained The background density in the Full color mode code 05 8310 8311 or 8312 will become the lowest if 0 is set On the other hand it will become the highest if 50 is set Changing the value will also change the background density in the Full color mode when the Background Adjustment indicator is set to the center Then if the background density of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is decreased by 5 lighter the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 5 lighter Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly diminish the quality of the light colored image Therefore carefully
112. When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select IMAGE SMOOTHING from among the color mode options LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image quality The correlation between color mode and file size is as described below The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original Therefore use the description below just for your reference Ratio of the file size in the Black mode to the Gray scale mode e If the file size in the Black mode with the Text mode selected is 1 it will be increased to approximately 7 times in the Gray scale mode e If the file size in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected is 1 it will be approximately doubled in the Gray scale mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 9 9 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 4 To Scan the Original while Reducing the File Size Before the adjustment After the adjustment Approx 600 KB Bole Approx 100 KB Approx 200 KB as SE Approx 30 KB Approx 900 KB nai Approx 150 KB The above file sizes are just for your reference The above file sizes are just for your reference If the original is constantly scanned at the If the original is scanned at a reasonable default compression rate th
113. You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use this procedure However step 3 in the procedure must be performed only by the service technician M EW G When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select LOW from among the compression rate options MID is selected from among the compression rate options by default After changing the compression rate scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use procedure 2 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 1 5 Scanning specific Adjustments gi pa 2 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select a higher resolution in the resolution option 200 dpi is selected from among the resolution options by default If noise occurs in a resolution of 200 dpi select a higher resolution 300 dpi 400 dpi or 600 dpi After changing the resolution scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If
114. a Coverage E Z Aati bl 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 22 To Prevent Dark Toner from Coming Off Before the adjustment After the adjustment Population transition of e STUDIO Country Damy 1359 toes Biceanty A Ei ceunty B County Bi county 0 EiceantyA Bounty E Ei County county 0 The dark toner comes off The dark toner is securely fixed Explanation When highly colored lines where a large accumulated amount of C M Y and K toners are used are created on raster data image such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF and printed on the rough surface of paper or thick paper the toner may come off the paper This is because the C M Y and K toners may be overlaid the paper may be extremely thick or the surface may be rough and the amount of toner used may be insufficient Adjust the limit value of the maximum amount of toner used in order to avoid a toner fixing problem This adjustment does not affect a single color of C M Y and K or bright colors such as red and green e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 89 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments PCL6 Ps3 xPrs EFJ This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Mi 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Decrease the values for code 8070 or 8071 to r
115. ack 05 7959 Photo Area where the density Medium density area High density area Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value 1s obtained Note that gradations density level in the medium and high density areas may be reversed with some setting values Subcodes to be entered differ depending on the target density area Refer to the table above to enter the subcode for the area to be adjusted The density of thin text or illustrations is changed by adjusting mainly the setting value for the medium or high density area Do not change the setting value for the low density area because if the subcode is set at 0 the density of the low density area is adjusted but there is little or no effect on changing the density of thin text or illustrations After setting the value copy and check the image quality Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used moir blurred text small dark text blurred diminished photo images or gradational images less accurate reproducibility of halftones Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MEFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumab
116. adjust the color density Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Color Twin color Details RED Halftone Auto gt Text area Change the values for Y 05 8062 M 05 8063 and K 05 8065 gt Graphic and image area Change the values for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 and K 05 8061 e When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Color Type Black amp Green Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Acceptable range BE y oo Yellow am vole M Set a value large M t E than 128 to Magenta than 128 to e Detail 05 8047 o2 fpes eron f osso ona Setavatue ONT e esse fa decrease e C moot a density Cyan E oad K Black Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 98 3 Printer specific Adjustments The color to be adjusted varies according to the color color to be used for the area other than black selected in the Twin color mode Refer to the table below and select the color to be adjusted Color to be adjusted Selected co
117. age quality must be changed on the printer driver Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 40 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 1 Open the printer driver properties and then click the Image icon on the Fiery Printing tab page 2 Select Best in the Image Quality setting GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties Fiery Printing PostScript About 1 hoa U B amp amp Untitled all Basic Job Info Media Layout Color Image JFinishing WOP stamping Printer Job View Toner Save Toner Reduction YI orf on Brightness 5 Sharpness Halftone Printer Status ae C Image Smoothing Hle efi Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Copying speed may be reduced depending on the adjustment e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 41 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 8 To Adjust Sharpness Before the adjustment Printed normally After the adjustment After the adjustment The image looks sharper The image looks softer LJ Explanation To print images to be sharper or softer depending on the original the sharpness setting on the print
118. agement Administration Device Job Status Setup ICC Profile General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Service ICC Profile Version Profiles Setting RGB Source Profile i Default Profile SourceRGB_v10 CMYK Source Profile Default Profile SourceCMYK vi0 Maintenance Destination Profile Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric 2003 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved d Click Browse of Import new Profile to select a file for the profile Then click Import Maintenance Destination Profiles as Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 MS_OP_A00 icc Import new Profile File Name C Users ooox Documents W ork_Im Current Profiles E OutputCMYK_v10 MS_OP_AOQ ice US Sheetfed Coated v2 USSheetfedCoated icc Euroscale Coated v2 EuroscaleCoated icc e Click Previous The display returns to the ICC Profile submenu f Click Save A confirmation dialog box is displayed g Click OK For the details of TopAccess see the TopAccess Guide e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 32113 3 Printer specific Adjustments E G Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab
119. al comune E Tharp wa ed rabie Ofte Dotage rae Lee paa bow all oyana Each county mia pppecoimately ee Each county mis aprenian 8 Se B t hii Food Thad ema hod S59 Od awa apa 30 30 2000 7g POO boo an a ah eh Lk ee PLA APD LS ALLS SL Vea aay The original is printed in the Full color mode The areas other than black is printed in the same color Red Explanation Select the twin color print mode option in order to change colored text and lines on full color original and print out the original The Twin color print mode particularly affects originals containing clear text and lines It does not affect originals where gradations of photo images are required Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether To Adjust Colors To Adjust the Sharpness or To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors Refer to the procedure corresponding to the particular user s request e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 94 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 1 To Adjust Colors IME 1 Select Twin Color from among the Color options on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Select Twin Color from among the Color options in the Basic tab Press the Details button Select the color to be used for the area other than black from among the Color options dratararnr ag Pap
120. al mode at power on Text Photo default o 2 Printedimage SS po Photo Map PS User custom Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select Custom from among the original mode options in the Black or the Full color mode If the CUSTOM button is not displayed in the original mode option change the values for the following codes to enable the Custom mode option In the Black mode Enter setting mode 08 Set 1 for code 7034 In the Full color mode Enter setting mode 08 Set 1 for code 7614 After changing the default original mode option copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 37 2 Copier specific Adjustments E T EW 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SOFT button to soften the copy image After softening the copy image copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments is necessary go to the next step 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7056 to 7058 7249 7795 to 7800 and 7806 to 7809 to adjust the default value for the sharpness intensity Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize moir Accepta Color mode Original mode 05 code DSO TRIES ble value value range Teat Set a value s
121. alance this option provides does not match the one on the monitor because priority is given to printing in highly vivid colors If Presentation is selected Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations will be applied to graphics and images while Detail which is intended to improve the resolving power will be applied to text from among the Halftone options Line Art is intended to reproduce thin lines clearly without jaggies visible on the printout Itis suitable for printing out line drawings The color reproduction this option provides is the same as the one the Presentation option provides But if LineArt is selected a special operation is provided to reproduce thin lines more clearly If Line Art is selected Detail which is intended to print halftones in detail with the high frequency will be applied to graphics images and text from among the Halftone options After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 8 3 Printer specific Adjustments Mf 2 Change the Color Balance option the Brightness or Saturation option on the printer driver For Windows _PCL6 PS3_ _XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Image Type Quality butto
122. ality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure EA This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing E 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the value for code 8118 to perform fine adjustment and increase the sharpness intensity e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Color mode Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below value value range Black and Set a value lager than Subcode Original _ 0 Th Image Set the value in increments of approximately 5 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Sharpness option Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause outlined edges jaggies and variations in gradation As a result the photo image may look unnatural Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPO
123. alues for the codes 7980 to 7983 to adjust the gamma balance of each color mode ode ded value range value a 05 7980 7980 egas 05 7981 Set a value User custom 0 1 2 larger than 0 to 255 Se 05 7082 7982 128 ae 05 7983 7983 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Subcodes to be entered differ depending on the target density area Refer to the table below to enter the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is a aa Low density area Medium density area High density area Q Cautions after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 81 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 19 To Copy While Erasing Shadow Outside of Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment owt NSA E ee it CADY l rt Hee et a gun gee i pai Wa ee etn aS Sea When originals such as books are copied an The shadow is erased area outside of the image is copied like a shadow because the original cover is not fully closed Explanation When originals such as books are copied an area outside of the image is copied like a shadow because the original cover is not fully closed Use the Outside Erase function to avoid copying areas outside of the image LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use all the steps of thi
124. an and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 3 4 e Filing specific Adjustments This adjustment will have an effect only on images JPEG format stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode M WE 7 C Select HIGH from among the compression rate options MID is selected from among the compression rate options by default The procedure to use varies depending on whether to select the compression rate on a job by job basis without utilizing the template utilize the template or change the default compression rate Refer to To select the compression rate on a job by job basis in order to store an image at a high compression rate for a particular job Refer to To utilize the template in order to select an appropriate compression rate corresponding to the type of original to store and the purpose of the image stored Refer to To change the default compression rate in order to have HIGH selected from among the compression rate options by default To select the compression rate on a job by job basis without utilizing the template When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select HIGH from among the COMPRESS options To utilize the template Recall the template where HIGH is selected from among the compression rate options and scan the original
125. anager e Color Editor is opened and a screen for editing the selected profile appears 4 Edit the profile if required or click Save if no edit is required e The Save screen appears e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 8 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 5 Change the name of the profile and then click OK The default name is name of the selected profile Copy 1 e The profile is copied under the set name The copied profile appears on the Output Profile field of the Profile Manager 6 Select the copied profile and then click Settings on the top of the screen e The Output Profile Settings screen appears Ei GA 1211 D6 Te CMP Consumables Drawer 1 AS A Plain Paisi Papir Grower 2 Ad Plan Puin Pager Lange iby Feed aa Rain Pain Pager ia Bypass Tray C mam Aaa Fain Patr Job Center A General Prefile Manager Teal g a CMYK Source Profiles Description Ge E Eurpsale Ero amp GO Coated 0 Unesared MPA verd iU japan Celer 2001 marl A M f Cared iLi Tr Offser Caned 2 0 lt RGB Source Profiles Command Workstation GA Del lb Logged in as Acminisbrabor eviich User gy boor eiup a Terns Label lin Drier pe Kurgaeale DO Corli 0 Unesaed DMPA gan gle YWOr Coghed TOTO Comed Pile aire Description G Apple Standard D s8G8 Po D Adobe BER 1098
126. and K are used to reproduce gray areas of image data such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF This provides a deeper gray on the printouts Change the option on the printer driver in order to maintain consistency in the gray hue between the drawing data and the image data e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 16 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Mf 1 Change the Pure Gray option on the printer driver Pure Gray allows gray areas to always be reproduced using all color toners C M Y and K without changing the hue of color areas This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Unmark the Pure Gray checkbox in the Basic tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute l Custom Color Settings Setting Photograph Halftone Resolution BE Auto El l600dpi Distinguish Thin Lines iw Pure Black
127. arks E Signatures Things to have for an emergency You may be on your own for a minimum of 72 hours following a natural disaster or other emergency Police fire and paramedics may be unable to respond to every need Be prepared to Manage without their assistance Electricity water telephone and natural gas service may be dismpted Utilities may be unavailable for many days Water At least 2 gallons of water per person per day for the time you plan for Replace stored water every 6 months Secure water heater with plumber strapping Liquids from canned food ice and toilet reservoirs will be safe Food Keep at least a 1 week supply of food on hand and rotate it into your regular pantry every 6 months Store foods with high nutritional value that are easily prepared Remember special dietary needs and keep pets in mind too First Ald It is vital that you know basic first aid Medical facilities may be overwhelmed and possibly difficult to reach Take a Red Cross first aid Attachments Comments E i ZE e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 3 88 YA nae ki Emergency Preparedness course and obtain a good medical emergency ou Output Preview fx Simulation Profile sRGB IEC61966 2 1 Ww Simulate Ink Black Simulate Paper White Ink Manager Show All wt Preview Color Warnings m Separations Re i Red EJE Green Ex ME Blue 4 Total Are
128. as Line Art Letter i E aoe Cc Settings Setting 1 Profile Setting 2 None z Save Profile Restore Defaults Setting LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 9 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 5 To Scan and Print while Minimizing Moire Before the adjustment After the adjustment When the image stored in the e Filing box is The image stored in the e Filing box can be printed moir is likely to occur printed while moir is minimized Explanation An original is scanned and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box When the image stored is printed directly from the e Filing box moir may occur depending on the type of original Also it is likely to occur particularly when the original is scanned in the Full color mode or the Auto color mode in a high resolution 600 dpi or even in the Gray scale mode Select an appropriate scan resolution or adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions in order to store the original and print it from the e Filing box while minimizing moir Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of t
129. as performed Media type Calibration Set Calibration EFlSpectrometer ES 1000 Operator Operator of the calibration e Operator The name of the operator when the calibration is performed from the control panel of the MFP such as the case of ColorCal e User name of a computer The user name of a computer when the calibration is performed from a computer using such as the case of ColorCal or DTP32 Method of calibration e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 3 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 1 2 Types of Calibration and Their Order Explanation To perform calibration with the Fiery Printer Controller GA 1211 perform two types of calibration when you are using a measurement device or perform two or three when you are using the scanner function of the MFP The types of calibration and the order in which to perform them are shown below 1 Calibration for the printer engine in the MFP automatic calibration for the printer function e Perform automatic calibration and then correct halftone image so as to reduce sudden changes in image density among the steps against an image processing signal 2 Calibration for the printer engine in the MFP for the scanner function e Perform it only when ColorCal is used for the first time 3 Calibration for the GA 1211 e Match the density level of the calibrated printer engine with the specified d
130. aster data print image or graphic data line drawing change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Set the value for Use Sharpness Filter within a range of 1 to 4 in the Image Attribute tab e Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image Initially set 4 and check the printout If further image quality adjustments are still necessary refer to lt Hint gt to do this Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast _ os ia Brightness ee o a Background Adjustment 4 Poo Saturation ooo o Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 50 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh E This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 e Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image Initially set 4 and check the printout If further image quality adjustments are still necessary refer to lt Hint gt to do this The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Se
131. at the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when performing printing in the Color mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 86 3 Printer specific Adjustments Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly change the hue of the text and the image such as a photo image on the printout Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts LJ Remarks To check the definition of black text When creating a PDF file 100 black may not be defined as follows depending on the application settings 100 black indicates the following values e RGB data RGB 0 e CMYK data CMY 0 K 100 As aresult text which should be defined as 100 black on the application is not defined as 100 black on the saved PDF file A small percent of color data is defined Eventually all color toners C M Y and K will be used to print it If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver print data are captured as RGB data If black text is defined as 100 black CMY 0 K 100 for CMYK data on a PDF file it will not be converted into 100 black RGB 0 for RGB data on Acrobat and it will be printed in colors It is recommended to print CMYK data on a PS3 printer driver instead of a PCL6 printer driver Use Output Preview on Acrobat 7 0 Professional to examine the color definition on the PDF file
132. ation But the USER option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option After performing automatic calibration copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 13 2 Copier specific Adjustments iW 3 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 4 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure GW 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7976 to 7979 to adjust the color density Color to ae Acceptable Pele t Toriginai mode 05 rp Recommended value Acceptable Tota e Magenta Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density 0 to 255 128 Text Photo 05 7975 01 2 K 05 7976 O 1 2 Black _Text Photo 05 7970 0 1 2 Set a value smaller than 128 05 7971 0 1 2 to decrease the density Cyan Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value
133. autions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 65 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 2 To Adjust the Reproducibility of Black in the Red and Black Mode The service technician must perform all adjustments i 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Set 1 for code 7937 to change the setting which is intended to improve the reproducibility of black areas If you are making a twin color copy in the red and black mode red may be blended into the black area In this case switching the value for this code reduces a blend of red in the black area on the copy x Reproducibility of black in the red and black mode SAUE HEE for a twin color copy oo OD O Default Intended to improve the reproducibility of black Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Setting 1 for code 05 7937 may not provide a clear boundary between red and black Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 66 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 3 To Adjust the Boundary between Black and Colors other than Black Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 Note that the adjustment results of steps 1 and 2 wi
134. base Used Photo base The default adjustment value for the custom mode is preset at the one that reproduces the image quality equivalent to that of Text Photo in the black mode at the time of shipment After setting the value go to the next step e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 73 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Adjust each setting value for the custom mode to satisfy the user s request e Select the necessary adjustments from the procedures below To match the density level of background scanned with the original glass equivalent to that of background scanned with the RADF a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 7025 to adjust the reproducibility of the background of the image scanned with the RADF The larger the setting value is the darker the background becomes The smaller the setting value is the lighter the background becomes 05 code Recommended value Acceptable range value Default Set a value smaller than 128 to make the background darker 05 7025 0 to 255 128 Set a value larger than 128 to make the background lighter To copy while eliminating the background color to adjust the reference value for the background density adjustment This adjustment is effective when you do not copy the dark color of the background of an original a Enter the adjustment mode 05
135. be calibrated with devices shown below e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 4 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Methods of calibration for GA 1211 X Rite DTP32 automatic densitometer eS i RS 232C DTP32 Series H X Rite DTP32 Series II automatic densitometer ee ee The accuracy of a calibration is upgraded due to the DTP41 Calibration X Rite DTP41 automatic spectrophotoi i use of a measurement RS 232C k device The more detailed setting is available with Spectrophotometer ES 1000 hand held the PC spectrophotometer USB a ColorCal The copier s built in scanner and the Kodak grayscale appended to GA 1211 a ee Calibration is performed easily because the scanner function of the MFP Calibrating from the The copier s built in scanner and the Kodak copier touch panel grayscale appended to GA 1211 The setting is easily performed from the MFP touch panel is used but any measurement device is not used ES 1000 above is an optional device of EFI which is originally manufactured by Gretag Macbeth 11 but customized exclusively for EFI The ES 1000 is hardware key for optional EFI Color Profiler or Spot On and these options will not be started unless the ES 1000 is connected to them Simple calibration ColorCal ColorCal enables calibration for the GA 1211 by measuring the toner density using the built in scanner of the MFP with
136. caenasivescecustantxcadeatesececeus 2 19 To Eliminate the Background Color c ccccccceececceeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeesaeeesaees 2 23 2 6 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeees 2 24 2 6 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode 00c0000 2 26 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of a Page Printed on TAD PADO eeo EEE ete EE tlc acute E eaten tunis 2 30 2 7 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode cccseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 31 2 7 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode cccccee 2 34 POEUN ATS WIOM e 2 36 To Copy Sharply To enhance sharpness ccccecceeseeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeees 2 40 To Make Photo Edges LOOK Softer sccccccdeccccscicncsanciesenanctecceeueteassceniesscousiecsas 2 43 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text Logo Highly Colored cccccsseeeeeeees 2 48 2 11 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo ce eeeeeeeeeeeees 2 49 2 11 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored LOQO ccccceeeeeeeeeees 2 51 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy 0cc00 2 53 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Papet c cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 2 56 To Obtain Smooth Gray Scale Photo IMAQES ccceseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaees 2 60 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode To change the threshold between the Fu
137. calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear As a result of the above steps the copy image quality will be corrected in the Full color mode and the Black and White mode simultaneously After performing automatic calibration copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure M W 3 Perform hue adjustment to adjust the tint of the color in the color area to change e Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press HUE button c Press the or button on the indicator of the color to adjust Pressing the or button on the indicator changes the hue as shown below For instance press the button at R Red Then the tint of R Red is closely matched with that of Y Yellow Press the button at R Red Then the tint of R Red will be closely matched with that of M Magenta R 2 l 7 d Enter the ENTER button After adjusting the hue copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 38040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 10 2 Copier specific Adjustments I WY 4 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of colors in general e Use steps a
138. carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 52 Before the adjustment E Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Awam multa vitiose and non distriv t indical on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew uira Mennumy ejusmod tempor mciuni ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ulam compor ndants im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupal Ui enim ad minim veniam quis mosinud exercitation ullam corpor nderits im volupale v lte illum dolore feu aod null parariatur Monnurn usmod tempor incdunt labore al dolore magna oat gy Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exencitation ulam compor nadenis im volupate velil ium dolore fou fupiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation uilan 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 E Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Awam multa vitigse and non distriv et indical on ingenion Sumde enim bon et maluta puew uira Monnumy ajusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad quis nostrud exercitation ullam compor ndants im volupate velite illum dolore feu f
139. ccurately reproduce colors on the printouts When you would like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the operating conditions perform automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 1 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Only the service technician must use procedure 1 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 2 PcL6 _Ps3_ xPrs EUI Ei 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in image contrast After exercising image quality control use the next procedure PeL6 _ Ps3 _ XPS ELEI E 2 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But the USER option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option Use steps a through J to perform the automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functi
140. cific Adjustments GA 1211 6 5 2 To Adjust Tone of Black Areas on Text or Line Arts The tone of black areas that are defined with a parameter R G B 0 0 0 can be adjusted Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Open the printer driver properties and then click the Color icon on the Fiery Printing tab page 2 Click Expert Settings of the Print Mode setting e The Expert Color Settings menu appears GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties Fiery Printing PostScript About 1 Preset E Ei ES La x z E Default Job Template Basic Joblnfo Media Layout Image Finishing VORP Stamping Printer Defaults Job View DE dies Print Hode a Standard Color Domo Gentoo 2 f Grayscale Printer Status i Black Detection Fg Composite Overprint Online h Substitute Colors Sih Combine Separations Auto Trapping e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 36 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 3 Select areas to be printed only with K toner in Black Text Graphics e Pure Black On The black areas on text and line arts graphics are printed only with K toner When this is selected the density of the black areas becomes darker t
141. color mode with the Printed image mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode 2 7 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 to 5 E 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure E 2 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the button to decrease the copy density Move the copy density indicator to the 7 side for 1 or 2 steps The images seen through the back of the page will no longer be copied But remember that text will also be lightly copied depending on the type of original After decrea
142. copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure E 4 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7286 and 7287 to set the range correction operation in the manual density mode fixed e The code to be set differs depending on the original mode Text Photo or Text Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 ae Recommended Acceptable oe dla gt 05 7286 05 7287 Explanation for setting values value operation Fixed Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 25 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 6 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore th
143. cted e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 34 mE 3 2 Copier specific Adjustments Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The value adjusted for the background density is shared in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected and in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode Perform copy image quality adjustment in the mode that is used for the adjustment while checking that in the other mode lt Note gt Making the highlighted area more visible or increasing the background density and eliminating the background color or decreasing the background density are mutually contradictory If the density of the background color is decreased the highlighted area may become less visible After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options
144. d LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase of the amount of toner used if the image density is increased or provide faint print images if the image density is decreased Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 73 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 19 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black Before the adjustment After the adjustment Example of configuration of a purification system pumped circulation type aquiclude aquiclude Gray yellow and cyan text is illegible on the The gray yellow or cyan text is printed in printouts black This makes it more legible on the printouts Explanation Text may look illegible on the printout depending on the hues of the background and the text contained in the original particularly when printing an original containing yellow light blue or gray text on a light colored background In addition when a full color original is printed in the Black and White mode the colored text may turn gray on the printout and eventually become illegible In this case change the option on the printer driver in order to reproduce the colored text except the white text in black and make it more legible on the printout This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS e
145. d the service training course e The default listed mentioned in this manual may be different from the actual ones due to the timing of shipping firmware version But note that the recommended values and acceptable value range stated in this manual remain the same Purpose of the Imaging Manual Icons The following icons used in this manual denote the following T F CXPS o l Mac Scan to Box Copy to Box e Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Black mode excluding the Image smoothing mode e Printer An adjustment having an effect on Black and White mode printing The adjustment will be effective if Black and White is selected from among the Color options on the Windows printer driver or if Mono is selected from among the Color Type options on the Macintosh print dialog e Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Black mode e Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Image smoothing mode in the Black mode e Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Gray scale mode e Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Full color mode e Printer An adjustment having an effect on full color printing The adjustment will be effective if Auto or Color is selected from among the Color options on the Windows printer driver or if Auto or Color is selected from among the Color Type options on the Macintosh print dial
146. d calibrating will disappear As aresult of the above steps the copy image quality will be corrected in the Full Color mode and Black and White mode simultaneously To correct variations in image density by performing automatic calibration for each paper type refer to 1 Perform automatic calibration for each paper type to correct variations in image density in 2 13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper To adjust the print image quality Use steps a through j to perform automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter the 6 to 10 digit administrator password Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the PRINT button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear j The message Is a result made to reflect will appear Press the YES button To correct variations in image density by performing automatic calibration for each paper type refer to 3 2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper After performing automatic calibration print and check the image quality If further image quali
147. d line tone characteristics of the target image and the thin line the measured values are almost aligned the calibration is satisfactory If not retry the calibration E Measurements vs Target View Plot Against Fiery Te045CMFP Plain NOTFINAL Measurements Target 24 27 30 T m oo _ Wn _ N Tm T D co o a Gd T i z E 5 oO o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Input Fo Target Profile Fiery Te045CMFP Plain MOTFIMAL Curves Meas Targ Cyan D Max D Max pam Magenta D Max D Max am Yellow D hax D Max el Black D Max D Max e testerint inate X Select Profile T l lt Note gt Never click Apply of ColorWise Pro Tools when finishing the confirmation of the graph If it is clicked the calibration results will be deleted 12 Print the Configuration Page and then check each field of Date Media Measurement Method and Operator on the page to see if the calibration has been performed for each media type Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 18 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 1 5 To Calibrate Measurement Page Target in Both Directions Explanation The density level of gradation steps on the Measurement Page to be used for the calibration except for ColorCal
148. der to adjust the value for 05 code in the Custom mode Never adjust any values for 05 code in existing original mode After adjusting the value in the Custom mode use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 19 5 Scanning specific Adjustments EII 3 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select Custom from among the original mode options Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 20 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 9 To Eliminate Shading around Scanned Images Explanation The white void amount around the scanned image is adjusted Since the void amount is very small in the stored image in scanning shading may appear around the scanned image due to a slight difference of the original size This can be eliminated by adjusting the setting value The setting value is applied to all resolutions and color modes Procedures All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician 1 Enter the setting mode 05 Change the value for the code 7489 to adjust the white void amount around the scanned image Acceptable 05 code Setting value Target Acceptable Default The setting value 1 corresponds to 1 dot with 600 ne ee a
149. determine whether the text to adjust is entered as an actual text font or as a graphic or image data LJ Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 and 5 Only the service technician must use procedures 4 and 6 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 79 3 Printer specific Adjustments M 1 If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver select a PS3 printer driver lt Hint gt If printing is performed on a PCL6 printer driver or if a file or a graphic application created on a DTP application such as Illustrator QuarkXPress FreeHand or CorelDraw is printed using the CMYK toners or a high definition PDF file created on these applications is printed black text may not be converted into 100 black But if printing is performed on a PS3 printer driver black text can be printed in black as shown on the file After printing on the PS3 driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure iy 2 Mark the Pure Black checkbox on the printer driver Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options lt Hint gt Text on the Web page may be raster data image created in GIF or JPEG format Black and white data created in PDF format by scanning the ori
150. dges of the image sometimes become highly visible on the copy Perform adjustment regarding image processing sharpness intensity in order to soften the edges of the image Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 to 5 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 43 2 Copier specific Adjustments BY WZ 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel and select the original mode option as follows e To copy in the Full color or the Auto color mode Select the Printed image mode option e To copy in the Black mode Select the Photo mode option When copying a photo image in the Full color mode select the Photo mode option from among the original mode options To have the above original mode options selected by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After changing the default original mode option copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are
151. djustment gt Full color lt Automatic adjustment gt Full color Auto color pena OEE eae oe when judged as color 05 7750 lt Manual adjustment gt Printed Image 05 7751 05 7752 05 7753 lt Manual adjustment gt 05 7763 The value for automatic adjustment will be applied only if the automatic copy density mode is selected Full color On the other hand the value for manual adjustment will be applied only if the manual copy density mode is Selected Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained lt Note gt Making the highlighted area more visible or increasing the background density and eliminating the background color or decreasing the background density are mutually contradictory If the background color is darkened to make the highlighted area more visible the hue of the background may change After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure i W 3 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the D button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TO
152. dy color balance on any type of paper Automatic calibration is the basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on the printouts When you would like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the operating conditions perform automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Only the service technician must use procedure 1 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 2 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 3 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 _Ps3 _ xPS ELE By 1 Enter setting mode 08 Set 1 for code 9059 e During automatic calibration the paper type can be selected and image quality control will be automatically performed Operation switching at calibration displaying of a paper selection menu during automatic calibration No paper selecting buttons display Value for 08 9059 Paper selecting buttons displayed For both Copy and Printer After setting the value use the next procedure _PcL Ps3 EED E 2 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in image density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration But the USER option can also be sel
153. e and conti be used to organize material adding a brgical sequence and conti muity to reports proposals or any multi page business document nuity to roperts proposals or any multi page business document A poster flyer form graph or chart will demand more attention A poster Myer form graph or chart will demand more attention if color is incorporated into its design Color can establish a recur if color is incorporated into its design Color can establish a reeur ring theme increasing brand recognition and can help arrange ring theme increasing brand recognition and can help arrange facts in a clear and logical fashion Focus attention Enlighten facts in a clear and logical fashion Focus attention Enlighten Explain Persuade Use color Explain Persmade Use color If the original is scanned in the Full color The image quality is maintained while noise mode or the Gray scale mode noise may occur is being reduced in text or edges of a solid filled area Explanation When an original is scanned in the Full color or the Gray scale mode the data compression may cause noise toner scattering around text or the edges of a solid filled area Adjust the compression rate or change the scan resolution in order to obtain a better scanned in image while reducing noise This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode Q Procedures
154. e changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment If Smooth is selected from among the Halftone options this adjustment will have no affect e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 53 3 Printer specific Adjustments After adjusting the color balance print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure GED This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Wf 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 8110 to 8113 to perform fine adjustment and increase the sharpness intensity e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied Color mode and Image quality type Acceptabl caor mage 05 code Subcode Fecommend g value mode quality type ed value range 05 8110 0 1 2 Auto Photograph 05 8111 0 1 2 Set a value 0 to 255 128 Color 05 8112 0 1 2 larger than 128 05 8113 0 1 2 o Ta Set the value in increments of approximately 5 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained lt Hint gt This adjustment affects on the following areas according to Image Quality Type e General Photograph and Presentation Only raster data print image e Line Art Only thin lines small text and raster data lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the
155. e copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step I WZ 2 Perform color balance adjustment to enhance black e Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the COLOR BALANCE button c Press the button to enhance the tint of BLACK Press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to the density area low medium or high density area d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the tint of black copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary even after the tint of black was set to the maximum the service technician must perform the next step e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 49 2 Copier specific Adjustments GW 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7811 7812 or 7816 to adjust the black logos Accepta Original mode 05 code ait ble value range 05 7811 Full color 05 7812 Set a value larger Auto color than 4 05 7816 Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained For the User custom mode refer to step 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After adjusting the level of black headline text copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustment
156. e diminished Therefore it should be printed out directly from the e Filing box rather than downloaded to the PC in order to obtain a fine printout LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Copy to Box _ _Print to Box E D Ii P 1 Print out the image stored in the e Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e Filing Web utility For further information regarding how to print it out refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide lt Note gt __ Faxto Box If the image is scanned or faxed and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box or Fax to Box download it to the client PC once select the desired Image Quality Type option on the printer driver and print it out rather than printing it out directly from the e Filing box Then the image may be finely printed For further information regarding how to print full color images scanned and stored refer to 4 8 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Q Remarks When Archive Document of the e Filing Web utility or Backup of the e Filing Backup Restore Utility is used image data stored in the e Filing box can be converted to a file maintaining the image quality optimized for printing For example you may want to temporarily move stored data to make some space in the box and save them again in the box When data are converted to a P
157. e file size may compression rate depending on the purpose of become larger than required the scanned in image the file size will be successfully reduced Explanation If an original is scanned in the default resolution and at the default compression rate a proper image will be obtained for general purposes But the file size may become larger than required The file size of the scanned in image significantly varies depending on the selected resolution or compression rate If an appropriate resolution and a compression rate are selected in accordance with the purpose of the original the image quality will be maintained while the file size is being reduced Change the resolution original mode or compression rate or perform the background adjustment in order to minimize the file size of the scanned in image The e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C offers the Slim PDF function This will diminish the image quality but reduce the file size to approximately 1 8 to 1 10 compared to the scanned in image 300dp1 compression rate MID in JPEG format Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to reduce the file size by changing the options when scanning the original or in Slim PDF Refer to To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original in order to reduce the file size without changing the file format Refer to To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF in order to give a higher priority t
158. e for Thick 2 3 4 e Selecting an input feeding tray e g LTR bypass tray e Printing the Measurement Page only one page e Scanning the Measurement Page with KODAK or TIFFEN Grayscale e Printing the built in Comparison Page or skip Even if you usually perform calibration only from the touch panel perform the scanner calibration using Calibrator at least one time at the initial stage so that the accuracy of ColorCal will be enhanced From Calibrator When the ColorCal calibration is operated from Calibrator many detailed settings are available as follows e Figuring out the last status of the previous calibration without printing the Configuration Page e Specifying Calibration Sets e Setting Apply to all calibration sets e Specifying the combinations of multiple profiles and the desired Calibration Set e Specifying the number of the Measurement Pages e Specifying the Patch Page number of the Measurement Page only for ColorCal e Calibrating the scanner e Printing sample images before applying calibration results e Printing sample images of a user file before applying calibration results The file Calib ps must be created Refer to 6 3 To Print in Desired Color Balance e Saving and downloading calibration data e Comparing the printer engine gamma before applying calibration results and the target gamma e Displaying the read values at calibration e Comparing the printer engine gamma after applying calibratio
159. e of using Customer Color Settings if Presentation is selected as the base type from among the Image Quality Type options the procedure below is to set a larger value for the Middle density of the color in the Color Balance Details option and register the name of Draft agenda iy 1 Open the property page of the printer driver in the Printers and Faxes folder Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Change the options in the Basic Color Balance and Image Attribute tabs in order to obtain the desired print image quality Ex Mark the Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab Press the Edit button Set the value for the Middle density of the color in the Color Balance Details option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute All Colors Each Color Color Balance Detail Cyan 0 0 0 Magenta 0 0 0 bee Yelow 0 4 z 4 0 HES A d 4 4 i am BEEBE EBB ERB EEE ES E 2 Restore Defaults Restore Defaults Cancel Cancel Help After setting the values use the procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 91 3 Printer specific Adjustments Wf 2 Register the name for what has been specified in procedure 1 in the Basic tab in the Setting option e Use
160. e quality With the background density set to the minimum if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied the service technician must use the next procedure MM P 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for the following codes below to adjust the density level of the background Adjustment Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Defaut value range Full color Auto color 05 7657 when judged as color gt gt O Printed image 05 7658 Set a value larger than 0 to 255 198 05 7659 128 Full color Map 05 7660 05 7661 To make another adjustment of the background for Full color after the above adjustment Adjust the density level while checking the color balance since it may differ from that of the original after the adjustment ies Acceptable Adjustment Original mode 05 code Recommended value ASS PIBEI Totaur Full color Auto color when judged as color rene Pull color lt Automatic adjustment gt Oto 255 128 Full color Auto color l when judged as color lt Manual adjustment gt Full color when judged as color lt Manual adjustment gt The value for automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only 1f the automatic copy density mode is selected On the other hand the value for manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the manual copy density mode is sele
161. e quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized c Perform automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure 2 After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks e Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e If printing on another type of paper causes a problem with the image quality after the adjustment return the set values for codes 05 2934 to 2937 to the default set value 5 and then perform the adjustment again e When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 4 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 2 To Adjust the Density of an Entire Copy Explanation The density on a solid co
162. e settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 4 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 a YW C Press the AUTO button on the Control Panel to select the automatic density adjustment M y Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure I WZ 3 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for the following codes below to adjust the density level of the background ee Acceptable Adjustment original mode 05 code Recommended value AZS PBEIS Totaur Full color Auto color D 05 7657 when judged as color gt OS Printed image 05 7658 Set a value larger than 0 to 255 128 05 7659 128 Full color Map 05 7660 05 7661 To make another adjustment of the background for Full color after the above adjustment Adjust the density level while checking the color balance since it may differ from that of the original after the adjustment BEY Acceptable Adjustment original mode 05 code Recommended vatue ABSePBEIS Totaur Ful
163. e user s desired image quality is still not obtained after the density has been adjusted use the next procedure This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Auto color mode YW 2 Select HIGH QUALITY from among the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK options to store the black and white original in the Gray scale mode e Use steps a to d to select the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK option a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the HIGH QUALITY button in the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK option LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment All scanning functions are implemented with reference to the density and the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK option They will affect the image quality of black and white originals stored in the Auto color mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment LJ Remarks If HIGH QUALITY is selected from among the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK options and black and white originals are scanned in the Auto color mode and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box this allows them to be stored in the Gray scale mode rather than in the binary mode and eventually provides better halftones The data will increase in size compared
164. e value to 0 Recommended Acceptable 05 7286 05 7287 Explanation for setting values Setting value Range correction operation Fixed After adjusting the background peak copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 32 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7190 to 7192 to adjust the gamma balance in each of the low and medium density area Recommended Original mode 05 code Subcode value 05 7190 ON geta value smaller th 05 7191 oa vale males than 10 255 05 7192 Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained Note that gradations density level in the medium and high density areas may be reversed with some setting values Since the subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted refer to the table below and set the appropriate subcode Remember that mainly adjusting the low or medium density area will change the copy density of the images seen through the back of the page Setting 2 for the subcode will allow you to adjust the high density area But this will not solve the problem Therefore never change the value for the high density area Area where the density is adj
165. ea becomes darker but the highly colored area becomes blurred Only the light colored area becomes darker L Explanation When the entire image is printed darker to make the light colored area darker the highly colored area may become much darker and blurred Change the options on the printer driver or adjust the color balance in order to make only the light colored area darker while leaving the highly colored area as it is e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 59 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 3 The item to set varies depending on the type of data to adjust Select an effective option according to the data format to adjust such as a print image raster data text font and line drawing graphic data For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing ME 1 Open the property page of the printer driver and press Setting button in the Image Quality tab Set the Background adjustment option in the Image Attribute tab within the range of 1 to 4 Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast 0 0 Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All ri
166. ected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option Use steps a through 1 to perform the automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter an administrator password of 6 to 10 digits Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the PRINT button g Press DEFAULT to set the default calibration setting or CALIBRATION to adjust the calibration setting When you press DEFAULT the system maintains the default calibration setting for the selected job type and returns to the previous screen When you press CALIBRATION a chart is printed out and the calibration guide illustration is displayed on the touch panel Proceed to the next step h Place the printed chart face down on the original glass aligning it with its left rear corner so that two black rectangular marks are on the left side 1 Press the START button on the control panel The calibration begins Do not operate the equipment until the message Scanning and calibrating disappears If the chart is not properly placed the message Set chart correctly is displayed on the touch panel In this case return to step h and realign the chart e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 T
167. educe the limit value of the maximum amount of toner used e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied Paper type and Halftone Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Acceptable 05 code Subcode Recommended value value range 05 8071 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Set a value smaller than 7 0 to 255 128 05 8070 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 the default 0 Plainpaper 7 OHP Set the value in increments of approximately 30 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause dark areas such as shades on photo images to look unnaturally faint Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 90 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 23 To Register the Image Quality Adjusted Corresponding to a Preference To use the Custom Color Settings Explanation The option to obtain the desired print image quality can be registered as Custom Color Settings This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments As an exampl
168. eeeeeaeeeeseeeeeaees 6 33 6 5 1 To Print Gray Areas Only with K Toner ccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeas 6 34 6 5 2 To Adjust Tone of Black Areas on Text or Line Arts ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 36 6 6 To Make Low Resolution Images Look Smoother cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 38 6 7 To Suppress Moire or Jagginess on Photographs cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 40 oS TOAG OCS a 6 42 6 8 1 To Adjust Sharpness Level of IMAQe cceccceeeceeeeeeeee eee eneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeas 6 43 6 8 2 To Change Default Setting of Sharpness Level cccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 6 44 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved iV 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment The output image looks light and blurred The output image looks darker and sharper Explanation When an original containing photo images or gradational images is printed the output image sometimes looks light and blurred Perform image quality control or automatic calibration and adjust the transfer roller bias output in order to obtain a darker and sharper image LJ Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Only the service technician must use procedures 1 3 and 4 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 2
169. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseees 4 10 To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e Filing box To print images stored through Copy to Box or Print to BOX ccceeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeas 4 12 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor OF Image EAItING cccccseccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeueeeeeseeseueeeeeeseeeseueeaeeeseeesaes 4 14 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored To print images stored through Scan 10 BOX sisine eclosion 4 16 POI Ns careers cee EEEE E EEEE EEE EE EE EEEE 4 18 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 1 To Clearly Scan Text To reduce noise around text ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 2 To Scan an Original while Eliminating the Background Color To eliminate the DACKO OUNG CEMSIWY orai 5 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Table of Contents 9 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 To Clearly Scan and Print an Original in Black and White To improve gradation and reduce GIraAiNINESS c sccccseccceeeecseeeceeeecceeeceseeeseeeenees 5 5 To Scan the Original while Reducing the File Size cceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 6 5 4 1 To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Siela MEENE E E E AOE A E A EEE 5 7 5 4 2 To Reduce the File Size in Slim PDF s n nannoannnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnrrnnrnnnne 5 10 To Sharply Scan the Original To increase the sharpness intensity 5 12 To Scan
170. efault It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type options as described in the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Apply to Auto Color Black and Twin General Photograph White Color Ta etc The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Whether to fix or change the maximum density in a high density area can be selected by the setting of 05 8066 Area where the density is Notes SEE adjusted Low densityarea l Medium densityarea 0 The maximum color density in a high density area is fixed 1 The maximum color density in a high density area is changed High density area lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is
171. egradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 55 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA ee fe Pi a ee Pe See F L Py ie e e oS oe ge n The copy image looks light on thick paper The copy image looks darker and sharper even on thick paper Explanation When image looks light on paper that is different from usual paper perform automatic calibration for each paper type to obtain the optimum image quality Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Only the service technician must use procedures 1 2 and 4 Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 56 2 Copier specific Adjustments BL EW 1 Perform automatic calibration for each paper type to correct variations in image density A privilege to perform automatic calibration is set to Administrator by default but th
172. ely when the user has a standard ICC profile that is most suitable for particular images he or she can apply this profile to the color conversion at the printing so that ideal print images whose colors are precisely converted can be obtained LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings E 1 Create the desired printer profile using the ICC profile creation software E 2 Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu Then upload the desired RGB source profile and printer profile e Follow a to g below to upload the profiles a Access TopAccess and open the Administration tab menu b Open the Setup menu and the ICC Profile submenu e Filing Logout Setup General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print senic 1CC Profle version Save Cancel e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 108 c Click Maintenance for the desired profile 3 Printer specific Adjustments The Maintenance Destination Profiles page for the selected profile is displayed TopAccess Device Job Status Logs Registration Setup ICC Profile e Filing Logout User Management oy General Network Copier Save as file Email InternetFax Printer Print Service ICC Profile Version Profiles Setting Source Profile Default Prof
173. em Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Distinguish Thin Lines 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x Color Settings 1 gt Distinguish Thin Lines Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO HH g Presets Standard Color Settings 1 j Color Type Halftone Toner Save Image Type General Black Over Print Text and Graphics Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto Preview Cancel Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Performing this adjustment on thin lines may not provide satisfactory results In this case it is recommended to perform the adjustment in conjunction with 3 14 To Clearly Print Light Colored Thin Lines or Text be made e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 67 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 17 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner To Print in the Toner Save Mode Before the adjustment After the adjustment Sales Contest Sales Contest i gt a y tiff a wy PA a My KY Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands Default printing Printing is performed while the toner is being saved Explanation The e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C offers a toner save mode It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the amount of toner used Change the option on the p
174. en a file to be used from an application on a client computer 3 Click Print on the File menu of the application e A dialog box for printing appears Note that the name of each menu may differ depending on the applications 4 Select GA 1211 as a printer name Then check Output to file and then click Properties e The printer driver of the GA 1211 appears Note that the name of each menu may differ depending on the applications e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 26 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 5 Click the PostScript tab 6 Change PostScript optimized for speed to Archive format for PostScript Output format PPD data are deleted by selecting Archive format 7 Click OK to print the file GA 1211E PS v1 0 D37 Printing Preferences PostScript output format Archive format v TrueType fonts Send TrueType fonts as Automatic X True Type Font Setting Substitute with Device Font kal Defaults 7 8 When the printing of the file is finished the finished print job will be accumulated on the Printed Job list at the bottom of the Command WorkStation menu Select this file and right click the icon of the file Then select Hold on this menu or Hold on the toolbar in order to move the selected file to the hold queue e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATI
175. ensity characteristics in the calibration for the GA 1211 The privilege of the operation of automatic calibration is restricted to an administrator by default However it is possible to give this privilege to a user For the setting of operational privilege refer to the MFP Management Guide The operation of the calibration for the GA 1211 is limited to the administrator and also a preset password is required for the operation In the calibration for the GA 1211 the GA 1211 detects the absolute value of the density level output from the printer engine using a measurement device or a reference whose density level is already measured Then the tone characteristics of the printer are corrected to the same level as that of the case when the embedded profile is created through the GA 1211 Namely any MFP can reproduce the same level of tone characteristics if only it refers to the tone correction made in this calibration Using this profile the accuracy of simulations such as ink simulation or spot color simulation which includes density correction is enhanced If the calibration for the printer engine for the printer function is omitted the adjustable range of tone reproduction of the GA 1211 will be narrowed and thus the tone reproduction will have a higher risk of the occurrence of banding or a sudden change in color tone Therefore be sure to perform the calibration for the printer engine for the printer function The GA 1211 can
176. ent mode 05 Change the value for code 7850 to adjust the tint of colors in Marker mode 05 code Acceptable value range Default _ 05 7850 Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the color where the adjustment is performed Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the color to be adjusted Subcode Color to adjust Y Yellow M Magenta Setting a value larger than the default value moves the hue of the color selected to as shown below On the other hand setting a value smaller than the default value moves it to For instance set 6 for R Red Then the tint of the red is closely matched with that of Y Yellow Set 0 for R Red Then the tint of the red will be closely matched with that of M Magenta After adjusting the hue copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 54 2 Copier specific Adjustments Wj 3 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 4 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality
177. ents This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode IE 1 Scan the full color image and store it in the e Filing box For further information regarding how to scan and store images refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide and Scanning Guide i I 2 Select a printing image mode suitable for the stored image e Use steps a to d to change the printing image mode a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the E FILING button d Press the button for the mode suitable for the image in the PRINTING IMAGE MODE option For further information regarding the features of each printing image mode refer to the explanation of the Image Quality Type options in Procedure 1 of 3 3 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance lt Note gt A change to the printing image quality mode will apply to all future printouts using the e Filing box Carefully perform the adjustment while printing out images other than the one that is used for the adjustment E T i P 8 Print out the image stored in the e Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e Filing Web utility For further information regarding how to print it out refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C
178. epeat this operation until the colors with which the user is Satisfied are printed out Test Print Comparison Page Paper Size Input Tray Auto Select Sample Image Page User downloaded CALIB PS in Hold Queue 11 When satisfactory colors are printed click Save of Color Editor to save the adjustment result e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 29 Precautions after the completion of the adjustment When use the ColorWise Pro Tools Color Editor if a profile to be adjusted is a CMYK Simulation Profile be sure to set the CMYK Simulation method Also if a profile is a CMYK Simulation Profile carefully check that the correct profile is selected when more than one Output Profile is assigned to one media type This adjustment procedure can also be applied to the confirmation of calibration When Color Editor of Command WorkStation 5 x is used a detailed setting such as simulation method cannot be set i O O Color Editor ISO Coated E ey m R D A Ez a Rrightness E 6 gl Input Output o 10 23 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 impur Test Print K o Swe Clase e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 30 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 4 To Print with Profile Attached to Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment A A D A T
179. eproducibility given priority Therefore it is recommended to select the automatic density adjustment in order to make the background lighter lt Note gt Making the highlighted area more visible or increasing the background density and eliminating the background color or decreasing the background density are mutually contradictory If the density of the background color is decreased the highlighted area may become less visible After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary or background elimination is necessary according to color use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 27 2 Copier specific Adjustments I WY 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7960 to 7979 to adjust the color density Color to ae Acceptable Calorio Torgina mode 5 pe Recommended value APP peta ae Magenta 128 to increase the sa oe 05 7972 density 05 7973 po Map 05 7974 o _Text Photo 05 7975 on K 05 7976 Black _Text Photo__ 05 7970 o1 1910 Set a value smaller than 05 7971 Mme do dece the Ca Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect t
180. er Handling Image Quality Effect Templates Print Job Original Paper Size E Normal Print Letter 181 2211 4 Print Paper Size Image Scale Same a Original Size fioo a 25 400 Paper Source Paper Type Plain z Destination Exit Trap Settings Number of Copies Profile IN Hie Orientation Portrait Landscape Save Profile Delete Ea rae a Restore Defaults Twin Color Details Select the color you want to convert the non black part of the document Cancel e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 95 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Open the print dialog box Select Twin color Black amp from among the Color Type options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Color Type 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Color Type Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Type Black and Red Black and Green Black and Blue Black and Cyan Black and Magenta Black and Yellow Black and White Halftone vi Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type General Black Over Print Text and Graphics Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto 27 C PDFw Preview Cancel After selecting t
181. er driver appears Click the Color icon from the Print Option and then click Expert Settings Then select None for CMYK Simulation Profile so as not to start simulation Do not mix with the settings for ColorWise Off Expert Golor Settines RGB Source Profile Rendering Style Fiery RGE v5 Me Presentation Print eray using black only RGb RGB Separation O Simulation Qutput Output Profile H O Use Media Defined Profile Text Graphics Imae Use Output Profile Fier Te045CMFP Plain viF pgs Spot Color Black Text Graphics Pure Black On 5 Pure Black On w ee Overprint Textilara Lhe ee 7 If the media type must be changed reset the Media Type of the Media tab menu Also be sure to set the size of media with the Page Size setting 8 After setting all of the above print the file Custom21 ps 9 The test pattern Custom21 ps is printed 10 Start up the Calibrator and then click Measure of Get Measurements to measure the printed pattern e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 17 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 11 Display the Measurement vs Target graph of the View Measurement of the Calibrator This graph shows the measurement values of the calibrated gradation steps If the bol
182. er driver must be changed or the service technician must adjust the default setting of the sharpness level in the adjustment mode 05 Q Procedures Procedures to follow vary depending on whether you would like to adjust the sharpness level of the image or change the default setting of the sharpness level Refer to the procedure most suited to your needs e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 42 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 8 1 To Adjust Sharpness Level of Image Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Open the printer driver properties and then click Image icon on the Fiery Printing tab page 2 Change the sharpness level to the desired one in the Sharpness setting e Q Center default e 4 Sharper 4 is for the sharpest e 4 Softer 4 is for the softest GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties Fiery Printing PostScript About Preset C E Er E4 Basic Job Info Media Layout Color Image f Finishing WOF Stamping Printer Defaults C Toner Reduction Brightness wharpness 100 Normal ne Halttone Printer Status Online Puta i Idle 4 Softest i Off efi LJ Precautions after the completion of the
183. erating environment of the MFP e When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 7 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 2 2 To Adjust the Density on a Photo or Gradational Image If the density is decreased If the density is increased Let s Gardening Let s Gardening There s something about gardens and There s something about gardens and rat pci aco rst gaa ast na Pol M Se eiF P inte F in ae eee a Pa mereg oo An original containing halftones such as a An original containing halftones such as a photo image becomes lighter photo image becomes darker Explanation A particular color can be intensely darker or lighter depending on the type of paper or original used Adjust the intensity of the laser in order to adjust the density on the photo or gradational image halftones and obtain the image quality the user desires LJ Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 8 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box EIU WG Enter setting mode 08 Change the value to adjust the image density of halftones during the copying printing operation e
184. erved 1 25 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks e Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality eOut of registration colors cannot always be perfectly corrected this depends on the type of text or lines to print e Also refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual for further information regarding color registration control procedures e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 26 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 6 To customize the image density WExplanation When the density of a solid area is adjusted to obtain the image a user desires the necessary correction value is varied by the installation environment or the usage of consumables such as the developer material and the drum In the developer bias setting in 1 2 To Adjust the Density of an Entire Copy since the correction value is varied not by the consumables or equipment state 1t needs to be rechecked according to the variation Customization of stable image quality is enabled by changing the target value of high density control not by consumables or the equipment state LIProcedures 1 Change the settin
185. es Both the service technician and the user can perform all settings E 1 Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting Printing Preferences Paper Handing Image Quality Print Job Image Quality Type E Mormal Print _ Profile Hame General kil Presentation Ts Line Art Photograph wee ue Advanced 1 2 3 z OOO me W Profile Setting 2 None Save Profile Delete Restore Defaults Setting Delete e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 121 3 Printer specific Adjustments E I 2 Select the desired profiles on RGB Source Profile CMYK Source Profile or Profile of the Destination Profile option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGE Source Protile s Printer s Default a CMYK Source Protile E Printer s Default hal W Apply to Device Color Only Protile b Destination Profile z Printer s Default f Frinter s Default f Perceptual C Relative Colorimetric 0 Saturation C Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now E 3 Open the Color Balance tab menu and then change each setting items to obtain the desired color balance Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced All Colors
186. eserved 2220 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 6 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 to 4 E 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure E 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7033 to 7034 7041 to 7044 7048 to 7049 7279 to 7280 and 7676 to 7679 adjust the density level of the background Acceptable e 05 7033 Black 05 7034 lt Automatic density 05 7043 1 adjustment gt Image smoothing 05 7044 55 128 Black 05 7042 lt Manual density adjustments Set 127 or larger 0 to 2 Auto color black lt Automatic density adjustment gt
187. et for thick paper mode and paper size e Press PAPER TYPE f Press THICK 1 g Enter the adjustment mode 05 Then select the subcode 1 for the code 2934 and change the setting value to 3 e Change the level of transfer roller bias offset in the color mode the front side of paper Check how the copy image changes carefully The setting value may be changed to 4 or 2 if required h Place paper to be used on the drawer that you selected in step d above 1 Perform automatic calibration Refer to step 2 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image After setting the value print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step E E M E 4 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum developer material and transfer belt unit and replace them if necessary e When replacing any consumable use steps a to c a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Handbook b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized c Perform automatic calibration For further information regarding the procedures refer to procedure 2 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image After replacing any consumable
188. f Adjustment No of stamps No of red characters indicator value 0 230 Approx 10 judged as color Approx 100 1 190 Approx 5 judged as color Approx 60 p 2 150 Approx 3 judged as color Approx 40 p 4 40 Approx I judged ascolor_ Approx 10 pS Approx 1 2 judged as color __ Approx 6 o 6 20 Approx 1 2 judged as black 4ormore Position of indicator 0 in the table above denotes the left end of the indicator the original is judged as black most and 6 denotes the right end of the indicator the original is judged as color most Adjustment value This refers to the judgment threshold for the Auto Color mode The adjustment value of the code in step 2 below will be added to this value The diameter of the standard stamp is approx from 8 mm to 12 mm In this field the number of the stamps on the chart and its judgment result are described The size of the standard red character is approx 10 5 pt In this field the number of the red characters entered and its judgment result are described After specifying the original size and copy size copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 62 2 Copier specific Adjustments W 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values
189. ffer from that of the plain paper mode after the adjustment e The PM counter value increases by 2 counts for 1 sheet of thick paper Remarks e Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including slowdown in the copying or printing speed e When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 22 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 5 To Correct Out of Registration Colors Before the adjustment After the adjustment Paper feeding direction gt Paper feeding direction gt The text and background are misaligned or out Text is aligned with the background and a clear of registration copy print image is obtained Explanation Colors of text or a thin line are sometimes printed out of alignment Perform color registration control in order to print or copy without out of registration colors LJ Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below 1 Make sure that no out of registration colors are visible on an original 2 Check the direction in which colors are misaligned This adjustment is intended to correct misaligned colors due t
190. further image quality adjustments are still necessary use procedure 1 3 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 8304 to change the JPEG compression ratio ratio value range value l Set a value smaller po than 128 for higher compression ratio 08 8304 0 to 255 128 Set a value larger than 128 o lower compression ratio Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The adjustment of the compression rate or resolution may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image quality The table below shows you the correlation between a resolution and file size The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original Therefore use the table below just for your reference The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 1 200 dpi 300 dpi Approx x 2 400 dpi Approx x 3 600 dpi Approx x 8 e If the resolution selected in procedure 2 is too high moir may possibly occur in the scanned in image Therefore carefully adjust the resolution while checking the scanned in image Remarks Use the following steps to change the default compression rate and resolution options a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d In the COMPRESS or RESOLUTION option press the button corresponding to t
191. g the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 4 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode The setting value for the Full color mode shall be applied also when the original is judged as the full color image in the Auto color mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 2 and 5 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 and 4 i 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure I 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Cont
192. g to the user s particular request e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 48 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 11 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use steps 1 and 2 Only the service technician can use steps 3 and 4 lt Important gt Before you start this adjustment make sure that no color misalignment exists on the logos If there is any correct it before the adjustment For how to correct the color misalignment deviation refer to 1 5 To Correct Out of Registration Colors in this manual and also the Service Manual 0 WZ 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel If you want to emphasize the reproducibility of text more select TEXT as an original mode If you want to emphasize that of photos select TEXT PHOTO If you want the TEXT or TEXT PHOTO mode to be the default original mode refer to step 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Text mode copy and check th
193. g value for 05 2662 to alter the target value of high density control ne the setting value for 05 Aa to ai the target value of high density control control Subcode code a in which EFI is installed Compatible with previous models 3 Models in which EFI is not installed default 1 This setting will automatically be forwarded to 05 2662 after the default setting of the EFI Printer Board 08 9951 is performed This will return to the restore setting of the EFI Printer Board 08 9952 2 The toner consumption of the equipment in which the EFI Printer Board is installed is equivalent to that of e STUDIO2020C 2330C 2820C 2830C 3520C 3530C 4520C 3 The solid density will be almost the same as that of the previous model e STUDIO2020C 2330C 2820C 2830C 3520C 3530C 4520C 4 Adjust the value of each color in the following range LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner consumed scattering of the toner diminished photo images or gradations less accurate reproducibility of halftones extremely dark images decreased resolving power extremely light images faint thin lines and shorten the life of the consumables Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 27 e No effect of the adjustment ma
194. ge When all the subcodes are set to 0 the specified color becomes white Specified color Color of toner from the control amountto be 05 code Subcode E panel adjusted g J644 0 10 255 128 Yellow green 7646 0 to 255 128 Cyan 7647 0 to 255 128 Pink 7648 0 to 255 128 K e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 68 2 Copier specific Adjustments 0 to 255 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 69 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 17 To Adjust the Image Quality Scanned from the RADF Before the adjustment The reproducibility of background may vary The gap in the reproducibility of background depending on how to scan an original is reduced Explanation The reproducibility of the background may vary depending on the type of original or whether the scanning is of an original placed on the original glass or one fed from the RADF Adjust the reproducibility of background while scanning an original fed from the RADF in order to minimize the gap in the reproducibility of the background using either method of how to scan an original Note that the adjustment results of steps 1 and 2 will be applied only to the Red and Black mode The adjustment result of step 3 will be applied to both of the Red and Black mode and the Twin Color mode enabling selection of other colors Only if further adjus
195. ge Before the adjustment After the adjustment A clear image quality most suitable for a type of paper used is obtained The image looks grained depending on the type of paper Explanation The image sometimes looks slightly blurred or grained on the copy or printout depending on the type of paper used Adjust the transfer roller bias output and the fuser temperature in order to achieve the image quality most suitable for the paper used Q Procedures All the steps in the adjustment must be performed by the service technician The procedure to be followed differs depending on the purpose as follows e To adjust halftone image Go to step 1 e To adjust images on the high density area only when recycled paper is used Go to step E I a y 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 2934 to 3937 to adjust the transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to optimize the halftones e The code to use varies according to the paper type Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 8 to optimize the halftones e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1244 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Recommended Acceptable Papertype type 05 code Subc
196. ghts reserved 3 60 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing I 2 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab Press the Edit button Set the value for the Low Middle density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of 1 to 4 in the Color Balance Details option This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on a Windows PCL6 or PS3 or XPS emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver Initially set 4 and check the printout Color Balance Detail Restore Defaults Ok After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure according to the image type e To adjust the color image Go to procedure 3 e To adjust the black and white image Go to procedure 4 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 61 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 GEER This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Wf 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 8042 to 8065 to increase the Low Middle density of the color e Adjust the
197. ginal are also raster data If the Pure Black checkbox is marked on the printer driver Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default Raster data are handled as an image which is intended to improve the texture and the 4 color toners C M Y and K will be used to print black If Text Graphic amp Image is selected from among the Apply to options only the K toner will be used to print black on raster data For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Pure Black checkbox in the Basic tab Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options Setting Basic l Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Save Curent Settings as Setting 1 General _s RResolutionrs S b00 ss Halftone HE Auto Soe Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines Apply bo F Pure Black Pure Gray Apply to Black Overprint aa Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C Cancel Text Graphic amp Image 3 80 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GEYER This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Select Black Text
198. ginal mode is changed If you want to scan only a particular job in the Printed image mode refer to To Set Original Mode for Each Job without Templates If you change the original mode according to the type or the purpose of the original refer to To Scan Originals Using Template If you change the default original mode in order to scan the original in the Printed image mode automatically refer to To Change Default Original Mode To Set Original Mode for Each Job without Templates Press the BASIC tab on the Touch Panel and select PRINTED IMAGE as an original mode To Scan Originals Using Template Recall a template whose original mode is set at PRINTED IMAGE to make a copy It is recommended to use a template if you want to change the original mode setting according to the type or the purpose of the original to be scanned First you must register the original mode settings as a template then use it as required so that you will be able to switch the original mode easily For how to use templates or details about templates refer to the Copying Guide and the TopAccess Guide To Change Default Original Mode on Touch Panel Use steps a to d to change the default original mode a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the COPY button d Press the PRINTED IMAGE button of the ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR option
199. han that of the simulated image e Rich Black On The black areas on text and line arts graphics are printed with Rich Black K 100 C 50 When this is selected the tone of the black area becomes deeper e Normal The black areas on text and line arts graphics are printed with four toners C M Y and K Expert Color Settings RGB Source Profile Rendering Style Fiery RGE v5 Presentation o Print gray using black only RGB Ofi RGE Separation f Simulation f Output CMYK Simulation Profile CMYK Simulation liso Coated Full Output GCA E Output Profile Print Gray using Black Only f Use Media Defined Profile Text Graphics Imae f Use Output Profile Fiery TeU45CMFP Plain IF oo aa v pot Color Black Text Graphi N Pure Black On E E a z Black Overprint Text Graphics r i Update Cancel LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 37 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 6 To Make Low Resolution Images Look Smoother Print data Before the adjustment After the adjustment Printed normally The image look smoother softer Explanation When images with a low resolution level are printed the edges of the images may become jaggy To suppress the jagginess the smoothing setting of the printer dri
200. he adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 4 Caan tr Daw S Ca fl j iC gt DU xX iy 1 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select PRTD IMAGE from among the original mode options This adjustment will be effective only if TEXT or PHOTO is initially selected from among the original mode options This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode After changing the original mode scan and store the original Then print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 10 4 e Filing specific Adjustments M WN 2 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select a lower resolution in the resolution option 200 dpi is selected from among the resolution options by default If moir occurs in a resolution of 200 dpi select a lower resolution 150 dpi is recommended After changing the resolution scan and store the original Then print and check the print image quality If you do not prefer to
201. he copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted The background highlight density will vary if the low or medium density area is mainly adjusted Setting 2 for the subcode allows you to adjust the high density area But it will not affect the background density Therefore never change the value for the high density area Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 28 2 Copier specific Adjustments M Y 5 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP perf
202. he default profile of the GA 1211 is given The image file is printed with the attached priority over a profile attached to the image profile file Explanation When the GA 1211 is used for printing the default profile of the GA 1211 has the first priority Therefore this default profile may be used even if a color profile is attached to the image file In this case the attached profile can be applied instead of the default GA 1211 profile by changing the setting of the printer driver Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 31 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 1 Open the printer driver properties and then click the Color icon on the Fiery Printing tab page 2 Click Expert Settings of the Print Mode setting e The Expert Color Settings menu appears amp GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties Fiery Printing PostScript About 1 Se z j Ly ES E 5 amp Basic Joblnfo Media Layout Image Finishing VORP Stamping Printer EA Defaults Job View Standard Color C Grayscale Printer Status i Black Detection ee Composite Overprint On lire ai a Subst
203. he desired compression rate or resolution option The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis Full color mode including the Auto color mode Gray scale mode and Black mode e The following resolution options are available as the default e Full color mode including the Auto color mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e Gray scale mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e Black mode 600 400 300 200 150 100 dpi e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 2 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 2 To Scan an Original while Eliminating the Background Color To eliminate the background density Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHART 8 1 TOSHIBA COPIER DEMONSTRATION CHART B 1 Function Automatic Exposure Control Function Automatic Exposure Control ATHE TOSHIBA TIMES 7 THE TOSHIBA TIMES HOW MANY DINOSAURS HOW MANY DINOSAURS DO YOU KNOW DO YOU KNOW TYRANNOSAURUS fPyrannceancus Rex the king of M ing of Me H aad The background color of the original is also The background color is eliminated allowing scanned Therefore no clear contrast is made clear contrast between the background and between the background and image image Explanation When an original with a background is scanned such as a newspaper and colored paper the background color is also
204. he value for the codes 7258 and 7267 to adjust the copy density The larger the setting value is the darker the image becomes The smaller the setting value 1s the lighter the image becomes Base original Density Acceptable osr a value smaller than Automatic osn67 7267 128 to make the image darker Text Photo 0 to 255 128 Manual 05 7258 seta value larger than 128 to make the image lighter e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 75 2 Copier specific Adjustments To adjust the changing amount of ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7261 and 7264 to adjust the changing amount of the ACS ADJUSTMENT indicator per step for the manual density mode The larger the setting value is the larger the changing amount per step becomes The smaller the setting value is the smaller the changing amount per step becomes Moving direction in 05 code Recommended value see ee prs g Base original mode osm 20 a value smaller than Ligh sep step poset 7261 20 to make the changing amount smaller Text Photo Dark step 05 7264 Set a value larger than 20 to make the changing amount larger Light step Moving the indicator to the side Dark step Moving the indicator to the D side lt Note gt Ifthe setting value is too small or too large the density level may not be changed
205. heck the print image quality Only if the saturation of R Red is still insufficient even after all the above procedures have been used must the service technician use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 28 3 Printer specific Adjustments iW 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for code 2905 to adjust the transfer 1st transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of the transfer roller bias for C Cyan and K Black so as to increase the density of R Red e The code to use varies according to the paper type and color to adjust Adjust the value for the subcode corresponding to the color for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 5 to obtain the highest density of R Red Color to Recommended Acceptable Sines iS Plain paper E GR 2 05 2905 2to5 0 to 10 Thick Eo A K K Black Never change the values for subcodes other than the above Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality lt Note gt The adjustment may possibly decrease the density of G Green B Blue and K Black extremely Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printout e Unless this adjustment changes the density of R Red return the values to the default set value 5 e This adjustment may affect not
206. hese options print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure according to the image quality problem the user has e To obtain a shaper or softer print image Go to procedure 2 e To make only the light colored area darker Go to procedure 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 96 3 Printer specific Adjustments Wf 2 Change the Color balance option on the printer driver For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Change the option in the Color Balance tab Set the value while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained Color Balance tab Change the All Colors or Each Color option To make detailed setting you can set it by marking Detail checkbox Same as Auto color or Full color mode Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute l All Colors Each Color Cyan 4 et Magenta 4 7 4 Yellow 4 nl Black 4 7 4 Detail Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 97 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8042 to 8065 to
207. hlighted area After performing the adjustment print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to step 3 BL Ii P 2 Ifthe image on the high density area looks grained on plain paper other than the TOSHIBA recommended one is used select recycled paper as a paper type To select the paper type refer to the Operator s Manual for Copying Guide e If fine adjustment of image quality in the recycled paper mode is required in accordance with the paper type follow the steps from a to b below a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value of the codes 2934 to 2937 to adjust 2nd transfer bias output In this step the transfer roller bias offset voltage is adjusted to print the high density area or the halftone area of the image most clearly Accepta Paper type 05 code mended ble value range paper Full color R led paper TE oa paper Front refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex mode Back refers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode e After adjusting the transfer roller bias output perform automatic calibration Refer to step 2 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image lt Hint gt The larger the setting value is the more the transfer voltage increases It is usually recommended that the set value be increased when you print on thick
208. hts reserved 5 15 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 7 To Scan an Original with the Desired Gradation Before the adjustment TRATION Photo Mode The image is scanned with natural gradation Default scanning After the adjustment After the adjustment DOSNT KIT CATON KIT Photo Mode Photo Mode Gradation is decreased Gradation is increased Explanation When an original is scanned in the Black mode or the Gray scale mode changing the scan density according to density area low medium or high density area allows a user to adjust the reproducibility of halftones gradation Adjust the gamma curve balance in order to change the gradation depending on the type of original or at a user s request This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Black mode or the Gray scale mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 16 5 Scanning specific Adjustments LJ Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments Bi 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7485 to 7488 to adjust the gamma curve balance of the low medium and high density areas Acceptable Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Default pm a value smaller than 128 Black 05 7486 0 1 2 to decrease the density 0 to 255 05 7487 O 1 2 Set a value larger than 128
209. ics after calibration The Measurement Page printed from Calibrator is a gradation step chart that is printed with the calibration function off The tone characteristics of this chart are detected to figure out how they deviate from those of the target image and according to the detected result the GA 1211 corrects the tone characteristics of the printer engine In other word the graph shows the status of the printer engine before correction Therefore there will not be any problem if the tone characteristics deviate from those of the target image With the GA 1211 you can check the tone characteristics after calibration in the procedure below using Calibrator Assign Output profile Se cll a Co ns ma a0 Generate 20 and a measurement device Measurement value LS 1 Rt 24 N oy t 0 20 3140 Bw 10 is 0 o a ao tw Input 9 input 4 Calibration curve 3 3 3 a a 10 7 30 40 50 oO mO BO BO Too rig na F eedazedw MDA Te YE fae TUTTAR ia 40 m w0 oe input 4 Target value e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 13 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 LJ Procedures Both the service technician and a system administrator can use all the procedures 1 Insert the User Software disk to a computer Then confirm that files Custom21 ps and Custom34 ps are stored in the Wind
210. ific Adjustments Explanation Initially a full color original is copied and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box as CMYK data or optimized for printing on paper But while it is being downloaded to a client PC using the File Downloader or the TWAIN driver it is converted into RGB data or optimized for displaying on the computer monitor Depending on the type of original this CMYK to RGB conversion may cause out of registration colors or graininess on the printout If the image is displayed on the monitor and further edited on the PC the image quality may be diminished To store a full color original and display it on the computer monitor while minimizing image degradation scan and store it in the e Filing box Scan to Box This allows it to be stored as RGB data LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode Wf 1 Scan the full color image and store it in the e Filing box For further information regarding how to scan and store images refer to the Operator s Manual for e Filing Guide and Scanning Guide Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 15 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 8 To Finely Print Color Images Scanned and Stored
211. ighest density of R Red Color to Recommended Acceptable cape T Piin paper ECAD COD 05 2905 2to5 Oto 10 Thick K Blac re K K Black Never change the values for subcodes other than the above Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality lt Note gt The adjustment may possibly decrease the density of G Green B Blue and K Black extremely Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image e Unless this adjustment changes the density of R Red return the values to the default set value 5 e This adjustment may affect not only the copy image but also every image quality such as the printout Therefore perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure particularly when the highly colored original is copied in the Photo mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC COR
212. ile SourceRGB_v10 T Maintenance CMYK Source Profile Ee 7 i Default Profile SourceCMYK_v10 Destination Profile Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 Rendering Intent Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric 2003 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All Rights Reserved d Click Browse of Import new Profile to select a file for the profile Then click Import Maintenance Destination Profiles aay Default Profile OutputCMYK_v10 MS_OP_AOD icc Import new Profile File Name C Users ooox Documents W ork_Im Current Profiles Des OutputCM K_v10 MS_OP_A0Q icc Description o US Sheetfed Coated v2 USSheetfedCoated icc Euroscale Coated v2 EuroscaleCoated icc e Click Previous The display returns to the ICC Profile submenu f Click Save A confirmation dialog box is displayed g Click OK For the details of TopAccess see the TopAccess Guide e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 109 3 Printer specific Adjustments E G Open the Properties page of the printer driver and then select Advanced on the Image Quality Type option on the Image Quality tab menu Then click Setting u M j 1 Deatisac Drafaranrarg Paper Handing Image Quality Print Job Image Quality Type Normal Print J Profile Mame Settings Profile None Save Profile E
213. ill be initialized After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The adjustment may possibly provide extremely dark images decreased resolving power inadequate reproducibility of gradations and extremely light images blurred images faint thin lines Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image e No effect of the adjustment may appear depending on the operating environment of the MFP Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image Remarks e The effect of the adjustment may vary depending on the usage pattern of the consumables such as the developer material and drum and the operating environment of the MFP e When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 10 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 3 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for the Paper Used To eliminate blur and graininess from an ima
214. imes not be accurately reproduced on the copy The inks of highlighters are special Therefore their hues cannot be accurately reproduced To reproduce the hues of similar highlighters such as yellow and green while producing sharp contrasts on the copy perform color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and color density adjustment e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 53 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedures 2 and 4 i 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button Press the MARKER button After selecting the Marker option copy and check the copy image quality When the copy image quality with the Marker option is insufficient cancel the Marker option and use the next procedure The one touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button again Mi 2 Enter adjustm
215. indicator will also be increased by 25 sharper e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 5 2 Copier specific Adjustments The values adjusted for the sharpness intensity are shared in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected and in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode Perform copy image quality adjustment in the mode that is used for the adjustment while checking the one in the other mode After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure M W 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7889 to 7892 to adjust the maximum color density of the text Color to Acceptable eis 05 7889 Set a value larger than 5 to M increase the density Ea Set a value smaller than 5 to ee 05 7891 7891 05 7891 decrease the density Set a value larger than 8 to increase the density 05 7892 Black Set a value smaller than 8 to decrease the density Set the value in increments of 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained This adjustment will be effective only if the TEXT PHOTO or TEXT mode is selected from among the original mode options If the TEXT PHOTO mode is selected the adjustment wi
216. ing on Windows PS3 is performed but not on Macintosh or if a file created on the above applications is printed However the color balance may be changed and also the image quality may be diminished depending on the type of file For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Select Photograph from among the Image Quality Type options Printing Preferences Paper Handing Image Quality Effect Others Templates Print Job E Normal Frirt Z aoe arts Cea eae ee 4 Image Quality Type Profile Hame 0 Letter E E gt pavane se 7 Settings Setting 1 Profile Setting 2 None Save Profile Restore Defaults Setting e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 14 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing CE Open the print dialog box Select Photograph from among the Image Type options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Image Type 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Image Type Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 1 Color Type Halftone Distinguish Thin
217. inter driver Change the Image Quality Type and Halftone options in the Image Quality tab e Set either of the following options in accordance with the type of original to print e Image Quality Type Halftone Presentation To make color darker Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Print Job Normal Print ai d Letter E E B Settings Profile None v Save Profile Restore Defaults Image Quality Effect Others Templates Image Quality Type Profile Name General aid Photograph Presentation Line Art Es gt Advanced Setting 1 Setting 2 vr Ce se Ae ee ee hy 1 Lad n Setting e Image Quality Type Halftone Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings r Setting 1 Presentation Resolution 888 600p Halftone Distinguish Thin Lines JV Pure Black Apply to NV Pure Gray Auto z Apply to WV Black Overprint Text amp Graphic PostScript Overprint gt Restore Defaults Cancel Help Line Art To make the color darker and enhance thin lines Auto or Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency e Printing Preferences Basic Finishing Paper Handling Pri
218. inting Modes gt Toner Save 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Toner Save Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO HH o Presets Standard Color Settings 1 Color Type Halftone Distinguish Thin Lines Image Type General HH Black Over Print Text and Graphics H Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto HH 7 PDF Preview Cancel Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly provide the image density lower than the user desires when printing is performed in the toner save mode Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Q Remarks The print density in the toner save mode can also be adjusted For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to 3 18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 70 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 18 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode Before the adjustment After the adjustment Sales Contest Sales Contest Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands Grand prize trip for two to the Cayman Islands The image density is too dark even when The image density in the toner save mode printing is performed in the toner save is adjustable as desired mode Explanation The e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C offers a toner save mode It is intended to
219. is adjusted Notes Low densityarea O Medium density area a high density area is changed High density area 0 The maximum color density in a 2 high density area is fixed 1 The maximum color density in a lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Halftone option For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL and Detail is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Detail or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 57 3 Printer specific Adjustments e When Mono is selected from among the Color options and Auto default is selected from among the Halftone options Detail of the Halftone options is applied to text and graphics illustrations and Smooth is applied to raster data images Therefore particular attention is required since the adjustment may have a different impact according to the patterns of the image to be printed After increasing the density print and check the print image quality If further image qu
220. is can be changed to the User For how to change the privilege refer to the MFP Management Guide e Follow steps a through j to perform the automatic calibration a Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value of the code 9059 to 1 so that automatic calibration for each paper type will be enabled Value for 08 9059 Display for user calibration Oo 0 Not displayed default Displayed b Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu c Press the ADMIN tab d Enter an administrator password in 6 to 10 digits Press the ENTER button e Press the GENERAL button f Press the CALIBRATION button g Press the COPY button h Press the CALIBRATION button to print a test chart 1 Place the printed test chart on the original glass j Press the START button to start the calibration The message WAIT disappears when the calibration is finished The procedure above covers both the color and black copy calibration After the automatic calibration copy and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to the next step I 7 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7913 to adjust the amount of toner used e The code to use varies according to the paper type Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the paper type for whose image quality you would like to improve and increase the value to
221. itute Colors BG Combine Separations Auto Trapping 3 Select None for RGB Source Profile Fiery RGB is selected by default Expert Color Settings RGB Source Profile Rendering Style Presentation Print gray using black only RGB Oti RGE Separation C Simulation Output GMYK Simulation Profile CMYK Simulation e liso Coated Full Qutput GCR n Output Profile Print Gray using Black Only C Use Media Defined Profile TextGraphics Imae T Use Output Profile Fiery TeQ45CMFP Flaim wiF oo am v opot Color Black Text Graphics Pure Black On r Black Overprint Text Graphice k Update Cancel LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 32 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 5 To Adjust Tone of Gray or Black Area Before the adjustment After the adjustment Photo area i I Photo area Text area Fe Wad Text area TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Variations in the reproducibility of gray areas Color balance is reproduced in a uniformed tone are caused by the types of originals by changing the method of the reproduction of gray areas Explanation When solid black areas such as line arts graphics text or drawing data on RGB images are printed from a Microsoft Office application n
222. ize in the Photo mode is 100 Original mode 100 Approx 20 e Correlation between the compression rate and the file size procedure 3 The file size is 100 with MID selected 100 HIGH Approx 80 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 8 5 Scanning specific Adjustments e The adjustment may possibly diminish the image quality as shown by the table below Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image Possible image degradation Any of procedures from 1 to 4 The photo image area may be blurred 1 or 3 Noise may be increase around text 1 or 3 Small sized text may become illegible Light colored images may not be clearly scanned Remarks e Use the following steps to change the default resolution original mode compression rate and or background adjustment options a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press the Next button several times to display the screen to change the default value in the desired Color mode e In the RESOLUTION ORIGINAL MODE COMPRESS and or BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT option press the desired button to change the default The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis Full color mode including the Auto color mode Gray scale mode and Black mode e
223. l color Auto color when judged as color es Full color lt Automatic adjustment gt Set a value larger than 0 to 255 128 Full color Auto color ak when judged as color lt Manual adjustment gt Full color when judged as color lt Manual adjustment gt e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 26 2 Copier specific Adjustments The value for automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the automatic copy density mode is selected On the other hand the value for manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied only if the manual copy density mode is selected Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The value adjusted for the background density is shared in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected and in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected Therefore adjusting the copy image quality in either of the modes affects that in the other mode Perform copy image quality adjustment in the mode that is used for the adjustment while checking that in the other mode In the manual density adjustment images are processed with the highlighting r
224. lable for the black mode by default However a new original mode adjusted to be able to satisfy the user s particular requests about image quality can be added as a custom mode One custom mode can be added for each of the color and black modes For users who frequently use the special type of originals or who are not satisfied with the image quality of the existing original modes it is recommended to register a set of copy settings that satisfy the user s particular requests as the custom mode The custom mode is made by adjusting image quality based on the Text Photo mode according to originals to be used It is also available to use the custom mode as an independent original mode This means that the change of the setting values in the custom mode does not affect each default original modes Q Procedures The adjustment procedure differs depending on whether in the black mode or the full color mode the settings in the custom mode are adjusted Ask the user which mode he or she uses and then refer to the procedure that is more suitable for his or her request 2 18 1 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Black Mode All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician E 1 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 7401 to enable the functions of the custom mode in the black mode Value for 08 7401 Custom mode for black mode Unused Used Text Photo base Used Text
225. le Y Yellow M Magenta C Cyan A A o y o Red Gen o F S o S A po Bwe J o S F y A o Onw o S S A Magenta PP gt YAow S S S Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in detail with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type options as described by the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Apply to Auto Color Black and Twin General Photograph White Color Graphic line etc Image etc The subcode varies depending on the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality T
226. lect Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type options as described by the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Apply to Auto Color Black and Twin General Photograph White Color E etc The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area lt Note gt This adjustment changes the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment e This code is commonly used in the Twin color mode and the Color mode After the adjustment the values changed will be also applied to the image quality in the Color mode When adjusting the image quality in the Twin color mode carefully perform the adjustment being aware th
227. led T SHARED All PLACES Fa Desktop f administrator F EFI 752ex Mac Gi Documents Standard 1 ps Standard34 ps Enable Supported File Types i 4 Confirm that hold is selected in Default Action and then click Import Flas to he impone Volumes Untitled PS Files Custom 21 ps 1327 KE Te 5 CMP ahi be E v4 65 0 GB free of 65 4 GB C Import J e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 15 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 5 Select the file Custom21 ps remaining in the Held field of Command WorkStation Then double click the file icon or right click it and select Properties Command WorkStation GA 1211 D6 Logged in as Administrator Sevitch User GA 1211 D6 l L meee ik Priming job Status job Tale Numb Copies Media Type Page Sire Processing dob Satus Job Title Numb Copies Media Type Page Sue Printed 10 Archived 0 Numb Comes Date Time Meda Tyoe Page Size FE er E Custom i p adminis LIMS Un Today 16 5458 Drawer 1 SR Plain Mem Peper Drawer 2 Al Plan Plain Paper Large Capacity Feeder Ma Pian Fran Paver 44 Bypace Tray Cutom Pisin Plain Paper e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 16 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 The Properties menu of the print
228. les e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 8 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original Before the adjustment After the adjustment The copy image looks yellowish compared The color balance of the copy image is closely with the original matched with that of the original Explanation Depending on the color balance of the original the copy image sometimes looks different from the original Perform image quality control automatic calibration color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and the color density adjustment in order to match the color balance of the copy image with that of the original Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Only the service technician must use procedures 1 and 5 Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 2 to 4 Procedure 3 Hue adjustment cannot be selected concurrently with procedure 4 Color balance RGB adjustments Performing either of the adjustments and then another adjustment clears what ha
229. lity may be diminished depending on the type of file e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 7 3 Printer specific Adjustments The Image Quality Type options feature the following e General e Photograph e Presentation e Line Art General is the best rounded option to offer fine printouts of any type of original including text photographs and graphics It is suitable for printing using word processing and spreadsheet software If General is selected Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations will be applied to graphics and images while Detail which is intended to improve the resolving power will be applied to text from among the Halftone options screen Photograph is intended to improve the reproducibility of halftones such as photos and gradational images This provides the color balance closely matching the one on the monitor with sRGB selected as a color space If Photograph is selected Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradations will be applied to graphics and images while Detail which is intended to improve the resolving power will be applied to text from among the Halftone options Presentation is intended to improve to the reproducibility of vivid colors It is suitable for printing presentation materials and graphics which require sharp contrast images The color b
230. ll Color mode and the Black mode to meet the user s needs ccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 61 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Table of Contents 2 16 2 1 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 To Adjust the Twin Color Copy Image Quality ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 2 64 2 16 1 To Adjust the Tint of Colors other than Black ccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 2 65 2 16 2 To Adjust the Reproducibility of Black in the Red and Black Mode 2 66 2 16 3 To Adjust the Boundary between Black and Colors other than Black 2 67 2 16 4 To Adjust the Tint of Specified Colors for Twin Color or Single Color CODI eee ene nee nee enone eet ee ene en eee cee mene eee toes 2 68 To Adjust the Image Quality Scanned from the RADF ccccssseeeeees 2 70 To Program Frequently Used Copy Settings TIUS CUSO MIIE er a 2 73 2 18 1 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Black Mode ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 73 2 18 2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full Color Mode cccseeeeeeees 2 78 To Copy While Erasing Shadow Outside of Image cccceeceseeeeeeeeees 2 82 To Avoid Copying Blank Page of Original Scanned with RADF 2 83 To Obtain Image in Even Density Level cccccecceeseeeeeseeeesaeeeesaeeeesaees 2 85 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 9 3 6 3 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14
231. ll affect only text or an area which is recognized as text After adjusting the maximum color density of the text copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure II 5 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used moir blurred text small dark text blurred diminished photo images or gradational images less accurate reproducibility of halftones and noise around the text on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 6 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 3 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Auto Color Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if
232. ll be applied only to the Red and Black mode The adjustment result of step 3 will be applied to both of the Red and Black mode and the Twin Color mode enabling selection of other colors ME 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the TWIN COLOR COPY button Press the RED amp BLACK button to enter the Red and black mode Use procedure 2 Ii 2 Press the ADJUST button Press the button or the gt button for Range Adjustment in order to adjust the boundary between red and black e E RED The black area decreases and the red area increases e gt BLACK The black area increases and the red area decreases After adjusting the boundary copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure Mi 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7641 7642 to adjust the boundary between black and colors other than black As the set value is increased the area of CHANGE BLACK TO will become larger On the other hand if the value is decreased the area of SECOND COLOR will become larger 7 Acceptable Red and black mode 05 7641 7641 Twin color Red and black mode 05 7642 0 12 0 to 255 RED selected in Twin color selectable mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjus
233. lored image and a photo or gradational image halftones can be adjusted as desired by the user Q Procedures The use procedure varies depending on whether you are going to adjust the density on a solid colored image or a photo or gradational image Refer to To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image in order to adjust the density on a solid colored image Refer or To Adjust the Density on a Photo or Gradational Image in order to adjust the density on a gradational image halftones 1 2 1 To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image If the density is decreased If the density is increased as va 1i 2e ala carte menu omy 5 ym ala carte men seg a De i M T piii it 5 rub Be Cy eT peii ir Ly mmp peed a ee kr ey a de me Se ee E rmy opeki gm ah toe br ey fee amen ep me Cee SS SS aA RSS Le Te nS ed Oat ee S 1 SS a RS LA ee ee ie re re rink menu The solid colored area becomes lighter The solid colored area becomes darker Explanation A particular color can be intensely darker or lighter depending on the type of paper or original used Adjust the developer bias output in order to adjust the amount of toner on the solid colored area and obtain the image quality the user desires LJ Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 125 1 General Adjustments
234. lts LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The Custom Color Settings indicate a condition where the default setting has been changed Adjusting the values in detail in the Setting option allows the user to register the desired print image quality LJ Remarks The checkbox in the Custom Color Settings option will be effective only if you login using a user name belonging to Administrator or Power Users only on Windows NT4 0 2000 XP Vista Server 2003 and open the property page of the printer driver in the Printers and Faxes folder e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 93 3 Printer specific Adjustments Before the adjustment Population transition by County 1920 2000 Coot populaton han been increasing makiy every prar Tha sapa populat iraia wel aret a Grn aacr on Cay reopen auch fa he Pari eyin 3 24 To Print a Full Color Original in Two Colors After the Adjustment Population transition by County 1920 2000 Coot populabon hai been increasing nahiy every prar Tis biped pagulan AS eel Bare a Gina aHa ce Cay Sieroter doch fa ie Pare net Gs he ote Rend Doomy C hows no popuri increase Gs he cher Rana EHAE Pet Popeye ire That airy and agricul ba niagyribon wima fo haw Th dairy and apicaal bia niagribon wama fo tiwo Diil Tay Pea gi Kh phh iar Cue The Population gi to shew doe E There wa reruns ofits Denese ae Lee paT bow
235. m and its compounds Molybden um and its compounds Thin lines or double lines are dotted on the The thin lines or double lines are clearly printout printed out Explanation When thin lines or double lines which are laid out on a solid filled area are printed out they may be dotted on the printout Change the option on the printer driver in order to clearly print them out LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 65 3 Printer specific Adjustments E II 1 Enable the Distinguish Thin Line option on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Distinguish Thin Line checkbox in the Basic tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Setting General Halftone Resolution foo 8 fom OC W Pure Black Apply to W Pure Gray Auto X Apply to We Black Overprirt jetken E PostScript Overprint Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 66 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Girt Open the print dialog box Enable the Distinguish Thin Line option The menu to select varies according to the operating syst
236. maller Black than 128 0 to 255 28 to 127 ssi mage smoothing 05 7809 S oS S O O Text Photo 05 7796 05 7797 05 7798 Set a value smaller Full color o than 128 0 to 255 M 28 to 127 05 7800 ___ don 05 Oo Usercustom 05 7795 S S O O Auto Autocolor Text Photo 05 7806 J Text Photo 05 7806 hen udesi Set a value smaller when judge 05 7807 than 128 0 to 255 as black Photo 05 7808 28 to 127 The smaller the value is the weaker the sharpness intensity becomes The larger the setting value is the stronger the sharpness intensity becomes Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the MAGE menu is set to the center Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is decreased by 25 softer the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 25 softer However the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from 100 to 100 of the total of the setting value of the adjustment code and that of the indicator For instance 1f the setting value of the adjustment code is 103 25 from the default value the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is 3
237. menu Then click Setting Ta Jreferancesc Paper Handling Image Quality Print Job B Mormal Print Image Quality Type Profile Hame General t l Photograph Presentation Line Art Advanced amw aan Profile Setting 2 None E 4 Select the uploaded CMYK profile on CMYK Source Profile on the Advanced tab menu E E Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGE Source Frofile Printers Default If Apply to Device Color Only Protile Destination Profile Printer s Default Rendering Intent f Printers Default Perceptual Relative Colorimetric Saturation Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update How Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 114 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 5 Select the uploaded printer profile on Profile of the Destination Profile option on the Advanced tab menu Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Advanced Source Profiles RGE Source Profile oa Printer s Default hal a CMYK Source Profile E Printer s Default ul W Apply to Device Color Only Profile Destination Protile Jg Printer s Default Rendering Intent f Printers Default f Perceptual C Relative Colorimetric C Saturation f Absolute Colorimetric Restore Defaults Update Now Cancel Help Q
238. mulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 74 3 Printer specific Adjustments E 1 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Use Black for All Text checkbox in the Basic tab This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Save Curent Settings as Setting 1 General Halttone Resolution iii Auto 3 60 dpi Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines Fj Pure Black Apply to M Pure Gray Auto Apply to Black Overprint Text amp Graphic al e Cancel Help Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks Not all colored text may be printed in black depending on the type of text e g text larger than 72 points e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC C
239. n and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 19 3 Printer specific Adjustments ME 1 Mark the Pure Gray checkbox on the printer driver Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options Pure Gray allows gray areas to always be reproduced using only the K toner without changing the hue of color areas This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Pure Gray checkbox in the Basic tab Select Text Graphic amp Image from among the Apply to options setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute l Custom Color Settings Setting Photograph a Halftone _ Resolution Distinguish Thin Lines iw Pure Black Apply to W Pure Gray Text Graphic amp Image Apply to W Black Overprint ertia PostScript Overprint Restore Defaults Cancel Help Apply to Apply ate tet onic SRR mage Black K toner
240. n in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Change the option in the Color Balance or Image Attribute tab Initially change the value by 4 steps while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e Color Balance tab Change the All Colors or Each Color option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Each Color l Detail Restore Defaults Cancel Help e Image Attribute tab Change the Brightness or Saturation option Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast 7 lo Ki gt brightness 4 a 4 Background Adjustment S 4 fo 4 Ll l Saturation OO m i MV Use Sharpness Filter 4 m Restore Defaults OK Cancel Help __Cancel Heb e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 9 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Mac This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Color Balance option the Brightness or Saturation option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 3 gt Color Balance Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Brightness or Saturation 10 3 x 10
241. n results and the target gamma e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 6 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Differences in features between calibrations from Calibrator and MFP touch pane ColorWise Pro Figuring out the status of the last calibration with Configuration v Page Setting Apply to all calibration sets Specifying the Patch Page number of Measurement Page only for ColorCal Calibrating the scanner ColorCal Displaying a warning message when the Calibration Set is not assigned to a profile Printing sample images of a user file before applying calibration results Saving or downloading calibration data in or from a computer Checking gamma for calibration Checking gamma of the controller after calibration results are v applied also use Command WorkStation v v v v v v Printing built in sample images before applying calibration results e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 7 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 1 3 To Calibrate for Thick 2 3 4 Default Output Profiles and Calibration Sets Explanation Eight Calibration Sets and nine media types are assigned to four profiles in the default setting of the GA 1211 Four profiles Plain Profile Thick1 Profile Speciall Profile and Special2 Profile are assigned individually to nine media ty
242. nable LFD Yes Default LPO queue Print Queue Enable PServer Mo Enable Windows Printing Yes Server Name GA 1211 247E Server Gamments Workgroup or Domain WORKGROUP Node type H node Manuel WINS IF Address 127 0 0 1 iManual Paind and Print Drivers PS Scan to Windows SME Yes Enable Web Servdioas Yes Enable IPP Tes Enable Port sith Yes Port 9100 Queue Print Queue Enable Sean lo FTP No Enable FTP Printing Yes Require Password for Printing No Timeout sack 30 Dafault FTP queue Hold Queue Emable SNMP Yes Security Level Medium Enabla LDAP No Enable SNTP Ma Enable Proy No oige 2270s Plain Galibretion EFI Spectrometer ES 1000 Administrates JAIO 02 27 54 Thick Paper Callbration X Alle DTPS2 Admiretrabor OS 006 02 78 35 Special 1 Palbration EFI Spectrometer E5 1000 Administrator ON TOE 12 20 47 Special 2 Gallbration X Aile DTPS2 Adminstrator Publish Print Quawe Yes Publish Hold Queue Yes Personality Aulo Use POF XObjects On Update Information Ahaa Daza PS Setup Allow Gourler Substitution Yes Print to PS Emor No Cover Page sable Scale to Fit Off Convert Paper Sizes No Print Master Yes PCL Setup Paper Size Lette Defaut Orientation Portrait Form Length limes 60 Font Size pt 12 00 Font Pech chaninj 10 00 Symbol Set ROMANE Explanation for the Last Calibration field 09 10 08 02 27 03 Plain 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Date and time calibration w
243. ng box Scan to Box it is stored with binary data with reference to a threshold value This may make a dark area blurred and a light area eliminated Adjust the threshold value in order to clearly store the black and white original in the Auto color mode This adjustment will have an effect on the image stored using Scan to File and Scan to E mail e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 1 4 e Filing specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments This adjustment will have an effect only on images stored in the Auto color mode YW 1 This adjustment is effective when you scan an original judged as a black image at the most appropriate density level in the color modes e Use steps a to d to adjust the density a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the SCAN button d Press or D of the B W ADJUSTMENT IN ACS option to adjust the density level for scanning the original judged as a black image in the Auto color mode e If the density level is set to q the original will be stored with the low density e If the density level is set to D the original will be stored with the high density After adjusting the density scan and store the original in the e Filing box Then check the image quality Only if th
244. ng on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Image Type Photograph Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 M 05 8051 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below The hue of the black text printed using all color toners C M Y and K will look much clearer if the amount of the C cyan toner used is larger than the M magenta or Y yellow toner Remember that adjusting the density of K black does not affect the hue of the black text if all color toners are used to print the text Acceptable range me Y Yellow or M Magenta _ om me Black xes Haron p ns fe XPS Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 85 3 Printer specific Adjustments Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in details with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically se
245. nt Job Normal Print T El Letter EO E E Settings Profile None Save Profile Restore Defaults Image Quality Effect Others Templates Image Quality Type Profile Name General ead ka Photograph Eg Presentation Advanced Setting 1 Setting 2 x Setting WOODSON 3 000000 BEEBE e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C Cancel Help 3 47 Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings m Setting 1 Resolution E00dpi 7 Distinguish Thin Lines V Pure Black Apply to MV Pure Gray Auto na Apply to V Black Overprint Text amp Graphic M PostScript Overprint Restore Defaults Cancel Help 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GED This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Image Type and Halftone options The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 2 gt Image Type Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 1 gt Halftone 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 1 gt Image Type Halftone e Set either of the following options in accordance with the type of original t
246. nting performed with PCL6 and Halftone Detail or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment e When Mono is selected from among the Color options and Auto default is selected from among the Halftone options Detail of the Halftone options is applied to text and graphics illustrations and Smooth is applied to raster data images Therefore particular attention is required since the adjustment may have a different impact according to the patterns of the image to be printed LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 64 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 16 To Clearly Print Thin Lines Double Lines Before the adjustment After the adjustment Conglomerate Group s PRTR data Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate Corp Ursa Major Operations Conglomerate Corp 4 Zinc water soluble compounds Zinc water soluble compounds 16 _ 2 aminoethanol 2 aminoethanol 43 _ Ethylene glycol Xylene _ 69 Chromium Vi compounds 69 227 230 j Lead and its compounds Barium and its w ater solub le compounds 283 Hydrogen fluor ide and its water soluble salts 304 Boron and its compounds Boron and its compounds 346 Molybden u
247. ntout cannot be perfectly matched with the one on the monitor Change the Image Quality Type option in order to closely match the color balance on the printout with the one on the monitor at a user s request This adjustment will be effective in closely matching the color balance on the printout with the one on the monitor if the sRGB 1s selected as a color space Therefore remember that it may not be matched with the color balance on the monitor which does not support sRGB or if a color space other than sRGB is selected On commercially available monitors sRGB is not selected as a color space by default e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 13 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments WW 1 Select Photograph from among the Image Quality Type options This adjustment will be effective only if a file created on a general application such as Microsoft Office is printed in PostScript PS3 XPS and Macintosh It may not be effective if a file created on a graphic application e g Illustrator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed using the C M Y and K toners Unmark the Use PostScript Passthrough checkbox in the PostScript Setting options in the Others tab The Image Quality Type option will be effective if print
248. o differences between the paper feeding speed and rotating speed of the transfer belt Therefore it will be effective only if colors are misaligned in the paper feeding direction or the secondary scanning direction This adjustment cannot improve misaligned colors in the direction perpendicular to paper feeding or primary scanning or in the secondary scanning direction periodically partially at regular intervals Refer to Troubleshooting for the Image 1 Color deviation in the Service Manual 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 and print out the test print pattern to correct out of registration colors a Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 4719 Press the START button e Registration control will be forcibly performed b Enter code 104 corresponding to a desired test print pattern Press the FAX button e Paper is fed from the drawer to print out a test print pattern Test print pattern Test print pattern for identifying A3 LD out of registration colors Jot down the paper feeding direction on the printed test print pattern beforehand This facilitates identifying out of registration colors in the subsequent adjustment Use only the second page of the test print pattern e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 23 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 4 Check the second page of the printed test print pattern to identify
249. o have IMAGE SMOOTHING selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 60 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 15 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode To change the threshold between the Full Color mode and the Black mode to meet the user s needs Original ere infinitalus jerma Employee Guide Banais Summary lkabi reer PETT TER ate pha is tho e OO infinitalus pa ove intinitalus aiia a Employee Guide Berelis Summary Benefits Summary Hews rapar rrp Tick Poop Sh Lay Tae Dahi kannaa Vj Peta biamag Aiar ai ats Leer ic Ferm Cae bo a mlah wo be made uy of Leale o de ad arh d pu Sinie Disability naiara ppnsrj iarmi Te padni open sg piit serk DE F ane Foi i wrake i be lw ep ta sy It is copied in the Full color mode Changing the threshold value will allow a colored original to be copied in the Black mode L Explanation When the Auto color mode is selected it will be automatically determined whether an original is colored or black and white Then it will be copied in the Full color mode or the Black mode But adjust the threshold value in order to change the threshold between the Black mode and the Full color mode and suit the preferences of the user e STUDIO2040C
250. o print e Image Type Presentation To make color darker Halftone Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 1 Color Type Color Halftone Detail Ww Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type Presentation HH Black Over Print Text and Graphics Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto Preview Cancel Print e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 48 3 Printer specific Adjustments e Image Type Line Art To make the color darker and enhance thin lines Halftone Auto or Detail To make the halftone screen high frequency Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard HH a Color Settings 1 HA Color Type Color Halftone Auto HA v Distinguish Thin Lines Toner Save Image Type Line Art HH Black Over Print Text and Graphics HH Pure Black and Gray Black and Gray Auto HH 7 PDF Preview Cancel After changing the options on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 49 3 Printer specific Adjustments I 2 In procedure 1 if LineArt is selected from among the Image Quality Type options in order to adjust r
251. o switch the overprint setting ON or OFF Acceptable Switch the value as follows according to the user s request ern 0 Overprint OFF oie f 1 Overprint ON 2 Overprint ON only for PDF X files PDF X A standard for printing PDF files If a PDF file is created in a PDF X format this file is called a PDF X file e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 124 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment When the Overprint setting is ON it may take a long time to print files Q Remarks e When a PDF file is printed with a printer driver the Overprint setting is always ON e To check the effect of overprint setting before printing a PDF file you can check it using the Overprint Preview feature of Adobe Acrobat Reader by switching the previews e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 125 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 1 To Clearly Store a B W Image in the Auto Color Mode After the adjustment After the threshold value was adjusted Before the adjustment The light image becomes blurred and text DERETA becomes illegible Tokyo Banke kakan Hall Even the light image is not blurred Text is clear and legible Explanation When a black and white original containing black and white photo images is scanned in the Auto color mode and stored in the e Fili
252. o the file size reduction than the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 6 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 4 1 To Reduce the File Size by Changing the Options when Scanning the Original You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use this procedure However step 5 in the procedure must be performed only by the service technician Hwa o E 2 mM E 3 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Select a lower resolution in the resolution option 200 dpi is selected from among the resolution options by default Select a lower resolution option 100 dpi or 150 dpi to reduce the file size This adjustment will have an effect on an image scanned in all color modes Full color Gray scale Black and Auto color After changing the resolution scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures When scanning the original press the SC
253. o the replaced consumable to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner consumed scattering of the toner diminished photo images or gradations less accurate reproducibility of halftones extremely dark images decreased resolving power extremely light images faint thin lines and shorten the life of the consumables Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image e No effect of the adjustment may appear depending on the operating environment of the MFP Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image Remarks e The effect of the adjustment may vary depending on the usage pattern of the consumables such as the developer material and drum and the op
254. obtain the copy density that the user desires e In the 7913 setting the toner amount of Y M C and K single color is not changed but that of the overlaid color RGBK is controlled Recommended Acceptable Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Thick 4 05 7913 SPECIAL 1 SPECIAL 2 OHP Set the value in increments of approximately 4 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 57 2 Copier specific Adjustments The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Thick 1 106 to 163 g m Max 60 Ib Cover Thick 2 164 to 209 g m Max 110 Ib Index Thick 3 210 to 256 g m Max 140 Ib Index Thick 4 257 to 280 m 2 Max 150 Ib Index Use the recommended OHP transparencies and special paper After adjusting the amount of toner used copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure YW 3 Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 4 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original After adjusting the tint of colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary
255. ode in order to obtain the image quality the user desires e Select the necessary value for 05 code in the table below Acceptable range 05 7425 Range correction Automatic density 1 adjustment 0 to 05 7426 Range correction Manual density adjustment 05 7470 Sharpness adjustment 05 7475 Manual density adjustment center value 0 to 255 Black 05 7478 Automatic density adjustment 05 7480 Gannma curve balance adjustment 05 8371 Fine adjustment of black density 128 128 128 128 Background processing offset adjustment Denes Automatic density adjustment 0 to 255 a 05 8409 Background processing offset adjustment 128 Manual density justment 05 8370 Background adjustment 50 05 8371 Fine adjustment of black density 05 8372 RGB conversion method selection 05 8375 Sharpness adjustment 05 8380 Manual density adjustment center value 0 to 255 05 8381 Manual density adjustment light step value 05 8382 Manual density adjustment dark step value 05 8389 Background processing offset adjustment Automatic density adjustment 05 8394 Background processing offset adjustment Manual density adjustment For further information regarding the codes refer to the Service Manual 128 128 128 20 20 128 128 05 8334 Range correction adjustment Automatic 1 density adjustment Otol Range correction adjustment Manual density 05 8365 adjustment Full color lt Note gt Select the code for the Custom mode option in or
256. ode vale value range Front 05 2934 a l Full color Special 2 Recycled paper o Thcxk4 8 S S S SOS 4 Pl nppr O Tooo p paper Thick 1 Thick 2 Back 05 2935 Special 2 Recycled paper ee eee OE La ee ee OE E 4 Thick 1 Thick 2 ee 3 Front 05 2936 mn l Special 2 Recycled paper Black SOOS ee N S O E O ee en 4 Thick 1 Thick 2 Back hick 3 05 2937 Special l Front refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex mode Back refers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper type Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 105 g m 16 to 20 Ib Bond Thick 1 106 to 163 g m Max 60 lb Cover Thick 2 164 to 209 g m Max 110 lb Index Thick 3 210 to 256 g m Max 140 lb Index Thick 4 257 to 280 g m Max 150 lb Index e After adjusting the transfer roller bias output perform automatic calibration For further information regarding the procedures refer to procedure 2 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 12 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box lt Hint gt The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased It is usually desirable that the set value be decreased to obtain a clearly hig
257. oducibility of text The table below shows you the correlation between the value and image quality Default Intermediate 1 Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos Soft more than the one obtained when 2 is set gt Intended to improve the reproducibility of photos more than the one obtained when 3 is set Equivalent to the one obtained when the default 3 ne Intermediate value 0 is set 4 Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more than the one obtained when 3 is set 5 Intended to improve the reproducibility of text more Shar than the one obtained when 4 is set P For the User custom mode refer to step 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 46 2 Copier specific Adjustments LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment When an original containing text is copied the adjustment may possibly cause the text to become blurred on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image LJ Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 47 2 Copier specific Adjustments Before the adjustment Our Top Five Romantic Destinations Whether
258. of the GA 1211 changes in the direction perpendicular to the paper feeding direction when it is printed on A4 LT paper If a density difference exists on the page either at the front or rear side of the MFP a satisfactory calibration result may not be obtained e g dark steps in the pattern are smudged light steps become darker or the whole pattern becomes lighter Basically such problems must be corrected by the adjustment of the printer engine However if the correction is difficult they may be resolved by changing the direction of the Measurement Page its steps are to be parallel to the feeding direction before printing To change the direction of the gradation steps for A4 LT paper follow the procedure below Note that the density difference on the front or rear side may not be corrected by following this procedure Rear side Rear side Feeding Feeding lt Front side Front side LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use all the procedures 1 Place A4 R or LI R paper on the bypass tray of the MFP 2 Insert the User Software disk to a computer Then confirm that files Standard21 ps and Standard34 ps are stored in the Windows Color Files Calibration Files PS Files folder Standard21 ps is for a 21 patch chart for A4 R LI R and Standard34 ps is for a 34 patch chart for A3 LD Do not mix with Custom21 ps or Custom34 ps e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C
259. of the print image is so enhanced that it looks sharper Explanation Increase the sharpness intensity under the menu on the printer driver in order to obtain a sharper print image The sharpness adjustment will have an effect particularly on photo images such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 33 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments I 1 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 in the Image Attribute tab e Setting 4 provides the sharpest print image Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast Oo 4 Brightness TO 0 Background Adjustment 4 pT A Saturation AE Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 34 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GED This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 e Setting 4 provides the sharpes
260. og e Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Full color mode e Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in the Auto color mode e Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in the Auto color mode An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PCL6 emulation printer driver An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PS3 emulation printer driver An adjustment having an effect on printing with the Windows PSX emulation printer driver An adjustment having effect on printing with the Macintosh printer driver An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the scanning functions including Scan to Box Scan to File and Scan to E mail An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the copying functions Copy to Box An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the printing functions Print to Box An adjustment having an effect on an image stored in the e Filing box by the Fax and Internet Fax functions including Received Fax to Box and Received Internet Fax to Box Table of Contents 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 TOODA Dakr NWA OC cease cet ae esse cease eee ene 1 1 To Adjust the Density of an Entire Copy cccccccceccecseeeeeeeeeesseeeesaeeeesaeeees 1 5 1 2 1 To Adjust the Density on a Solid Colored Image
261. omatic calibration color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and color density adjustment in order to avoid this problem or to obtain an achromatic color for instance Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Only the service technician must use procedures 1 and 4 Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 2 and 3 BO 0 EW G1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct the color balance and copy density After exercising image quality control copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure B D Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density For further information regarding the adjustment procedures refer to procedure 2 in 2 2 To Closely Match the Color Balance of the Original ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibr
262. on a y 7 Feeding direction When the density is adjusted automatically the When the density is adjusted density on the entire copy image becomes manually the density of the entire uneven copy image is even Feeding direction LJ Explanation When an original with background is copied with the density adjustment set automatic the density of the background may become uneven To suppress this unevenness adjust the density manually LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use all the steps of this adjustment E 0 GY 1 Press the BASIC tab on the touch panel and then press A or D to adjust the copy density level Q Caution after the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 85 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance Before the adjustment After the adjustment Vv aaa 7 eB I The color balance varies according to a change The color balance is constantly maintained in the environment or a lapse of time Explanation The color balance varies according to a change in the environment replacement of the consumables and so forth Periodically adjust the color reproducibility automatic calibration in order to constantly maintain a steady color balance on the printouts Automatic calibration is the basic adjustment to a
263. ons menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter an administrator password of 6 to 10 digits Press the OK button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the PRINT button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform calibration When the calibration comes to an end the message Scanning and calibrating will disappear j The message Is a result made to reflect will appear Press the YES button Precautions after the completion of the adjustment When image quality control is repeatedly performed the color balance may slightly vary due to an error even in the same environment e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 2 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 2 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance on Thick Paper or Special Paper Before the adjustment After the adjustment The color balance varies according to the The color balance is constantly maintained on paper type any type of paper Explanation The color balance varies according to a change in the environment replacement of the consumables and so forth The amount of the change varies significantly according to the paper type Periodically adjust the color reproducibility automatic calibration corresponding to the paper type in order to constantly maintain a stea
264. ontrol value will be initialized c Perform automatic calibration For further information regarding the procedures refer to procedure 2 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image After replacing any consumable remember to reset the counter by making it correspond to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled Precautions after the completion of the adjustment After the fusing temperature was adjusted in step 2 above printing interruption may occur due to improper fusing temperature Therefore adjust the value carefully If you want to change the conditions for printing interruption change the value of the 08 code 5409 abnormality process starting temperature setting recycled paper For the setting values refer to the Service Manual Remarks e Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e The desired image quality may not be obtained depending on the type of paper used In this case use the recommended paper and then print or adjust the image quality e If an image problem occurs when y
265. option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Printing Modes gt Do not Print Blank Pages 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Print Mode gt Do not Print Blank Pages Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO R o Presets Standard HH Print Mode Normal Department Code Disabled Do not Print Blank Pages Enabled T i 7 PDF Y K Preview Y Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may not possibly operate the following options as programmed Therefore pay special attention to the combination of options e Booklet printing e N up printing e Use Front Cover e Use Back Cover e Interleave Pages Remarks If any data are inserted in the header or footer of a particular page on Excel or Word even though no data are present in the body the page will not be recognized as a blank page The header or footer will be printed out e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 78 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 21 To Sharply Print Black Text Before the adjustment After the adjustment Emergency Preparedness Emergency Preparedness Wih a ee tae ieee pr aa eae J hamra preparats you cm ar ar rre 4 paai mede pen ral poar he cae nenutal d ke sert sdicutions dbeirg carefa amd pre al deste and oct trek a Fire Extinguisher A ype ABC Ere exting he bed
266. option on the printer driver For Windows 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Uncheck the Use Sharpness Filter checkbox in the Image Attribute tab To make a softer image check its checkbox and then set the value within a range of 1 to 4 Setting Basic Color Balance mage Attribute Contrast 1 E o 4 Brightness Background Adjustment d 4 E a 7 4 Saturation Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C E 3 37 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GEE This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Set the value for Sharpness within a range of 1 to 4 e Setting 4 provides the smoothest softest print image The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Sharpness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 2 HH Color Balance Cyan Magenta Preview Cancel LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adju
267. option on the printer driver e Select the desired value for saturation on a scale of 4 Palest to 4 Brightest For Windows PCL6 PS3 XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Change the Saturation option in the Image Attribute tab Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast 1 0 4 b Brightness E E 4 0 4 gt Background Adjustment 4 ss SSS 4 a Hi a m Saturation a oem 4 i Use Sharpness Filter A m h Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 27 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh GED This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Open the print dialog box Change the Saturation option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Saturation 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Saturation Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO HA g Presets Standard HH Color Settings 2 HH Color Balance Cyan Magenta Image Attribute Sharpness Brightness PDF Preview Cancel E Print After changing the option on the printer driver print and c
268. or right click it and select Properties C CEBUMAMarn e WorkStation _ z z GA 1211 06 Logged in as Administrator Switch User Servers Job Center Device Center M nO D fs Print Properties Preview Delete Calibrate Logs Paper Catalog GA 1211 D6 i i TeS UMFF Printing Jot Status Job Title User Size Numb Copies Media Type Page Size job Summary Processing Cancel Job status Job litle User ze Numb Copies Media lype Fage siza Printed 10 Archived 0 User Size Numb Copies Date Time Media Type Page Size ste m acminist 1 3 MB Un Today 18 30 36 H kahlaa a gt Merr acminist L3 M8 Un Today 14 38 58 Drawer 1 AA R Plain Plain Faper Drawer 2 Ag Plain Plain Paper La rge Sg Feeder E lain Plain Paper i Bypass Tra wam Plain alain Peper 7 The Properties menu of the printer driver appears Click the Media icon from the Print Option and then select A4 R LT R in Paper Size Then change the setting of Media Type as required Then click Expert Settings 8 After setting all of the above print the file Standard21 ps 9 The test pattern Standard21 ps is printed 10 Start up the Calibrator and then click Measure of Get Measurements to measure the printed pattern Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All right
269. original mode options To have TEXT selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Text or Map mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 51 2 Copier specific Adjustments Mi 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7960 7961 7965 7966 7970 7971 7975 7976 and 7980 to 7983 to adjust the density level of each color Color to Original mode 05 code Subcode Recommended Acceptable adjust value value range Y alias text Set a value larger gigo55 qog than 128 E gt Bp Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause a dark colored area such as in a photo to become blurred on the copy Also it may also cause offset failure grained images and degradation in gradation Therefore
270. ormally they are printed only with K toner while gray areas are printed with all the C M Y and K toners so as to reproduce the depth of colors If you would like to reproduce gray areas only with K toner instead of using C M Y and K toners or adjust the tone of black areas change the settings on the printer driver LL Procedures Procedures to follow vary depending on whether you would like to print gray areas only with K toner or adjust the tone of black areas of text and line arts graphics Refer to the procedure most suited to your needs e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 33 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 5 1 To Print Gray Areas Only with K Toner Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Open the printer driver properties and then click the Color icon on the Fiery Printing tab page 2 Click Expert Settings of the Print Mode setting e The Expert Color Settings menu appears GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties Fiery Printing PostScript About Preset i Default Job Templais Defaults dob Yiew mas Print Hode a Standard Color Doomoo a 2 C Grayscale Printer Status W Black Detection ee Composite Overprint Online Lh
271. ormance including degradation in the image quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 29 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 7 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of a Page Printed on Thin Paper Original printed on thin paper front Original printed on thin paper back After the adjustment When a double sided original printed on thin The images seen through the back of the page paper is copied the images seen through the are not copied any more in duplex copying back of the page are also copied Q Explanation When a double sided original printed on thin paper such as a brochure and leaflet is copied the images seen through the back of the page are also copied Perform background adjustment in order to avoid this problem e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 30 2 Copier specific Adjustments Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode or the Full color mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request Refer to the procedure to adjust the copy image quality in the Full color mode with the Printed image mode selected in order to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected The value adjusted is shared in the Black mode with the Photo mode selected and in the Full
272. orp sac Pee Substance A A Ov Substance Substance name number number 4 Zine water soluble compounds a Zine water soluble compounds 43 Ethylene gheal 000000 col Mylene s C idC Xylene 6a 3 Lead and its compo 230 Barium and its water soluble compounds pees drogen fluoride and its water soluble salts Boron and its compounds 304 Boron and its compounds Molybdenum and ts compounds 346 Molybdenum and its compounds When a twin color copy is made in the red The blend of undesired colors in the black area and black mode red may be blended in a is reduced part of black area Explanation When a twin color copy is made red may be blended into the black area or colors other than black on the twin color copy may look different from what the user desires Adjust the tint of the colors the reproducibility of black in the Red and black mode or the boundary between black and colors other than black in order to reduce a blend of undesired colors into the black area or adjust the tint of colors other than black Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the tint of colors other than black the reproducibility of black in the Red and black mode or the boundary between black and colors other than black Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 64 2
273. ors Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image or printout e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 11 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 6 To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e Filing box To print images stored through Copy to Box or Print to Box Before the adjustment After the stelle Copy to Box Print to Box e Filing box Print data Copy to Box Print to Box Print data Stored aa e Filing box Downloaded Converted into RGB Stored Client PC Stored Print Print data Print Converted into print data again If the image stored in the e Filing box is If the image is printed out directly from the e downloaded to a PC and then printed out the Filing box the image quality will be image data conversion may diminish the image maintained quality e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 12 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Explanation Initially the original is copied or printed and stored in the e Filing box Copy to Box or Print to Box as CMYK data or optimized for printing on paper While it 1s being downloaded to a client PC using File Downloader or the TWAIN driver it is converted into RGB data or optimized for displaying on the computer monitor RGB data are not suitable for printing on paper Therefore if printed out the image quality may b
274. ou use the other paper type temporarily set the values of the 08 codes 2934 to 2937 bias offset and 5293 to 5296 fusing temperature during printing back to the default ones Then perform the adjustment again e When replacing any consumable refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 15 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box 1 4 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions To optimally program image quality control Before the adjustment After the adjustment The image contrast varies depending on the The image quality is constantly maintained date and time when copying or printing is performed or the type of job e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 16 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Explanation The image contrast may vary depending on the date and time when copying or printing is performed or the type of copy print job To constantly maintain image quality shorten the waiting period until image quality control is performed LJ Procedures The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below EUP 1 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 2505 2507 2508 2509 2677 or 919
275. out preparing any expensive measurement devices such as spectrometers or densitometers ColorCal can be operated by starting Calibrator on a computer connected to the MFP or from the control panel of the MFP without a computer Note that the accuracy of the calibration with ColorCal is lower than that of calibration with a measurement device because the built in scanner of the MFP is not originally developed as a measurement device If problems such as false contour color spots in gray areas or color imbalance occurred after calibration with ColorCal such problems are often resolved by recalibrating with a measurement device such as DTP 32 or ES 1000 The differences between the ColorCal calibrations from the touch panel of the MFP and from Calibrator are shown below e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 5 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 From touch panel When the ColorCal calibration is operated from the touch panel of the MFP the following operations are available e Selecting Calibration Sets The Calibration Set of only one selected media type is valid for the calibration Note that the operation starts without a warning even if any Calibration Set is not assigned to a profile however it will not be applied to the result Especially the Calibration Set for Thick2 3 4 that is not set by default must be assigned to a profile by referring to procedures in 6 1 3 To Calibrat
276. ow Enter the value within the recommended value range Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality Set a smaller value High compression small file size low image quality and high scanning speed Set a later value Low compression large file size high image quality and low scanning speed To leave the color of text as it is Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a Turn the original and place it Or when scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Change the Image Rotation option to turn the original After changing the Image Rotation option scan the original and check the scanned in image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure b When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the button to decrease the sharpness intensity Decrease the sharpness intensity by 1 step from the current value To eliminate the background density Use steps a to b to perform the adjustment a When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the d button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density scan the original and check the scanned in image quality Only if the user s desired image quality is still not obtained after the above procedure has been performed scan the
277. ows Color Files Calibration Files PS Files folder These two files are for DTP 32 and DTP32 II Custom21 ps is for a 21 patch chart for A4 R LI R and Custom34 ps is for a 34 patch chart for A3 LD Do not mix with Standard21 ps or Standard34 ps If a measurement device to be used for calibration is ES 1000 or DTP 41 it 1s recommended to use an EPS file in a folder Windows Color Files Calibration Files Halftone Calibration Files Other Applications or a PSD file in a folder Windows Color Files Calibration Files Halftone Calibration Files Photoshop in the User Software disk for confirmation The EPS file can be downloaded to the hold queue of Command WorkStation The PSD file must be printed from Photoshop after setting None for the CMYK Simulation Profile setting of the Expert Settings 2 Open the Command WorkStation menu and select as follows File gt Import Job __ amp Command WorkStation 3 0 Edit Actions Go Server View Window Help _ Anoo Import Job 31 Con mP ATET musta Servers Freview Delete Calibrate Logs Pag GA 1211 D6 Tep45 OMFP Job Status Job Title User Size Nui Processing e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 14 3 Select a file Custom21 ps on the Select Files To Import menu and then click Open i 4 0 0 Select Files To Import ra Y DEVICES J Macintosh HD E iDisk _ Untit
278. paper or paper with asperities on its surface On the other hand the set value should be decreased when you print on thin paper After setting the value print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to step b e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 13 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box b Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value of the codes 5293 to 5296 to adjust fusing temperature in the recycled paper mode In this step fusing temperature is adjusted to print the high density area of the image most clearly Paper 08 Subco type code de rang Normal temp e e STUDIO4540C Black 3 to 8 0 to 16 5 Normal temp e Others 4 Center Color Recycled 08 son E neater ji Low temp pa e e STUDIO4540C Black 3 to 8 0 to 16 7 Low temp e Others 6 Color Normaltemp P a S E L SAA F e e STUDIO4540C Black 0 to 16 5 Normal temp Ober 1 R l Side Color ecycled 08 5294 heater E k paper e e STUDIO4540C TT 7 0 to 16 7 ow temp e Others 6 a a OO AE A Normaltemp i b a S S temp Black 1 Normal temp _ k Color Recycled 08 5295 ne Low temp paper Black Low temp E A A OC CO A a a a a a Normaltemp o Ta S temp Black Normal temp me Pressure Color Recycled 08 5296 roller Low temp paper Black Low temp OG Color e Af
279. perform the adjustment for Macintosh e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 42 3 Printer specific Adjustments Wf 1 Change the Use Sharpness Filter option on the printer driver For Windows XPS Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Uncheck the Use Sharpness Filter checkbox in the Image Attribute tab Always set Uncheck Setting 1 or a smaller value may provide blurred print images Setting Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Contrast a oa eK Brightness lt E _ Background Adjustment 4 pC Saturation E Restore Defaults Cancel Help e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 43 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh ETI This adjustment will have an effect only on full color printing Enter the adjustment code 05 Change the values for codes 8110 to 8113 and 8118 to 0 to change the sharpness setting OFF Image Acceptable type range 05 8110 0 1 2 05 8111 0 1 2 Auto Color 05 8112 0 1 2 0 to 255 128 05 8113 0 1 2 05 8118 0 1 2 a 0 Text lt Note gt When the value of this code is changed the sharpness setting of Windows is also changed to OFF e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3
280. pes by default If you would like to calibrate to reproduce more accurate colors according to the media types you need to create a custom profile and newly assign a Calibration Set to it Media types assigned to each profiles default PlainPaper O Y o o o G O Recycled Paper Yo o o o ooo o S O Thickl Paper o Thick Paper o Thick3 Paper o Thick4 Paper Speciall Paper Thick1 Profile is assigned to Thick 2 3 and 4 and Plain Profile is assigned to Recycled Paper and each of them is shared with Thick 1 and Plain Paper individually by default Therefore calibration for each media type such as Thick 2 3 4 or Recycled Paper is not possible in the default setting To perform calibration for each media follow the procedure below 1 Create an output profile for Thick 2 3 4 or Recycled Paper 2 Assign a Calibration Set for the media type to the created output profile This section describes a procedure for creating an output profile exclusively for Thick 2 by copying the profile of Thick 1 Q Procedures Both the service technician and the administrator can use all the procedures All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Start up the ColorWise Pro Tools or Command WorkStation 5 x and then open the Profile Manager 2 Select the profile of Thick 3 Click Edit at the top right of the screen of the Profile M
281. pes to be used on the Output Profile Settings menu The content of the media setting will be linked to the profile 3 Perform automatic calibration for the media type assigned to the profile 4 Uncheck Apply to all calibration sets on the bottom left of the Calibrator menu Then click Customize to assign each Calibration Set 5 Perform calibration for the GA 1211 for each media using ES 1000 or DTP32 Apply To Apply recent measurements to the following other calibration sets C Plain Recycled Thick Paper Thick3 Paper Thick4 Paper Special 1 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 23 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 Check Use media defined profiles if available on the Default output profile field of the Advanced Edit menu Advanced Edit Fiery Te045CMFP Plain w1F 7 Select Use Server s Default for Output Profile of Expert Settings of the printer driver menu or select Use Media Defined Profile for the printer driver l Output Profile f Use Media Defined Profile C Use Output Profile Fey Tene Pan iF Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Be sure to check Use media defined profiles if available at the Default output profile of Advanced Edit when two way communication is disabled and Use Server s Default is selected for Output Profile e STUDIO2040C
282. pt See the PS3 row in the table below 05 code Recommended value Acceptable value Default ps3 05 8160 0 Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density Set a value larger than 176 to increase the density Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 72 3 Printer specific Adjustments To adjust the image quality on Black and White printing Black and White is selected from among the Color options on the PCL6 or PS3 or XPS printer driver Mono is selected from among the Color Type options on Macintosh The Color options are available in the Basic tab on the PCL6 PS3 and XPS printer drivers The Color Type options are available in the Color Settings 1 menu in the print dialog box on Macintosh a Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the value for code 7307 to adjustment the upper limit of the image density in the toner save mode Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below 05 code Recommended value Acceptable value Default PS3 05 7307 0 Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density A Set a value larger than 176 to increase the density Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtaine
283. rator or a DTP application e g QuarkXPress is printed or a PDF file created on these applications is printed Basic Color Balance Image Attribute Custom Color Settings Save Curent Settings az Setting 1 General a Halftone _ Resolution E J 2 ioe Use Black for All Text Distinguish Thin Lines Pure Black Apply to Pure Gray _ Ssh Auto al Apply to V Black Overprint TexbeGraphic a Restore Defaults ox Cancel Help lt Note gt The adjustment may provide all colored text in black After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure because text may not be defined as 100 black on the file e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 82 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 Ps3 xPS EVJ This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing Wf 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8210 to 8212 or 8249 to 8254 to adjust the threshold values for Pure Gray and Pure Black to adjust the area to print only using the K toner e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied Apply to PDL Item Subcode Image quality type Printing on Macintosh is perfo
284. re grained Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 21 3 Printer specific Adjustments 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8210 to 8212 and 8249 to 8254 to adjust the judgmental threshold for the Pure Black and Gray setting SE ine sane Se Ps PCL XPS 8250 0 1 2 3 4 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 1 8251 0 1 2 3 4 1 to 255 1 1 1 8 1 O 0 o General Ca Photograph 2 Presentation 4 havne If the default value is 1 change the Pure Black and Gray setting to Off on the Color Settings menu of printer driver since no value smaller than is provided When Text Graphic amp Image is selected for the Apply to setting on the printer driver setting menu photo areas whose colors are close to black may be treated as black because the larger the value is the wider the area to be printed only with K toner becomes Therefore adjust the value carefully while checking the copied image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 22 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness Before the adjustment The image is printed with a natural brightness Default printing After the adjustment After the adjustment A darker print image is obtained A brighter
285. rease the background density Then select HIGH from among the compression rate options This adjustment will be effective only if the original with a color background such as a newspaper and color paper 1s scanned This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in the Full color mode including the Auto color mode or the Gray scale mode After decreasing the background density and changing the compression rate scan the original and check the scanned in image quality With the background density set to the minimum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use other procedures i YW 5 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 8304 to change the JPEG compression ratio Compression Recommended Acceptable 08 code subcode Fate range value Default Set a value smaller poo than 128 for higher compression ratio 08 8304 oo2ss 128 Set a value larger than 128 lor ONE compression ratio Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The table below shows you the correlation between the adjustment and file size The ratio of the file size may vary depending on the type of original Therefore use the table below just for your reference e Correlation between the resolution and the file size procedure 1 The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 100 e Correlation between the original mode and the file size procedure 2 The file s
286. remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to 0 Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables While replacing any consumable also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit and thoroughly clean it if it is soiled e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 21 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box Precautions after the completion of the adjustment e The adjustment may possibly slow down the copying or printing speed extend the warm up time when the MFP is returned from the auto power save mode and shorten the life of the consumables because of an increase in the number of times image quality control is performed Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image e Note the following when you print in thick paper mode in step 3 e Printing speed decelerates to 17 5 sheets per minute A4 LT after the adjustment e The thick paper mode cannot be set for the LCF Large Capacity Feeder optional Therefore the maximum number of sheets acceptable for continuous printing should be the one for the drawer However in the copying mode you can set the thick paper mode to more than one drawer and copy more paper continuously with the automatic drawer change function e The density level of the halftone image may di
287. rinter driver and perform printing in the toner save mode for instance if a large number of copies have to be printed or if the image density is too high LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 68 E I 1 Enable the Toner Save option on the printer driver For Windows PeL6 Open the property page of the printer driver Mark the Toner Save checkbox in the Others tab m ATE Basic Finishing Paper Handling Image Quality Effect Templates Print Job Default Menu Setting Normal Print Basic i gt TopAccess Do not Print Blank Pages Letterhead Print Mode lv SNMP Communication SNMP Settings Output Devices Add Printer Custom Paper Size User name Alias User Department Code D E rane aha ay NS eo settings LDAP Server 4 Protile None Custorn Settings File Import Export Save Profile Delete Restore All Defaults Version Information Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 69 3 Printer specific Adjustments For Macintosh Open the print dialog box Enable the Toner Save option The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Pr
288. rmed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Acceptable Apply to PDL 05 code Subcode Recommended value value range PCL6 05 8210 0 1 2 3 8 8 8 8 Text 05 8252 0 1 2 3 4_ Set a value smaller than 8 8 8 8 8 ems Oi764 je oe 8 8 8 8 8 the area to print only PCL6 05 8211 oa Near thea oner 1 1 1 8 Graphics 05 8253 0 1 2 3 4 1t0255 1 1 1 8 1 05 8250 0 1 2 3 4_ Seta value larger than 1 1 1 8 1 N the default to increase the I aa PCL6 05 8212 O28 lites a roa 1 1 1 8 Image 05 8254 0 1 2 3 4 the K toner 1 1 1 8 1 05 8251 0 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 8 1 The subcode varies according to the Image quality type where the adjustment is performed Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the Image quality type to adjust Image Quality Type 090 General O Photograph Presentation Color Profile lt Note gt If the graphic and image options are changed the adjustment may possibly cause the unnatural hue of gradational and photo images and the inadequate reproducibility of gradations Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 83 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing 5 Open the property page of the printer driver and press Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the
289. rocedure 2 E M P A When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity scan the original and check the scanned in image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure E U Ii P 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 8335 to 8337 and 7430 to 7433 to adjust the sharpness intensity es Acceptable Color mode Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable T petaun Black Pp Text 05 8335 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 128 Grayscale 05 7433 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause moir In addition when text and thin lines in a light colored background are scanned the background around the text or line may be eliminated Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the scanned in image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 5 13 5 Scanning specific Adjustments 5 6 To Scan an Original while Enhancing Black Before the adjustment After the adjustment TOSHIBA COLOR CHART TOSHEA COLOR CHART Ho TOCC 1 i 1 Hoa Tee T
290. rol Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the following procedures Wf 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7796 to 7800 to strengthen the copy density of text or increase the sharpness intensity e The code to use varies according to the original mode Text Photo Text Printed image Photo or Map Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the original mode in which you would like to improve the image quality and set values larger than 128 for codes 05 7796 to 7800 Original mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable value range Default Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 128 Setting 0 provides the softest image while setting 255 provides the sharpest image Changing the values for these codes will change the sharpness intensity when the Sharpness indicator in the IMAGE menu is set to the center Remember that step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is increased by 25 sharper the value of each step of the
291. rtain media type is selected in this setting the selected media type is assigned to the profile and then this information is linked to the media information of the printer driver so that a profile that corresponds to the selected media type will be automatically selected The profile is automatically linked to the media type only when Use Media Defined Profile is set for Output Profile of Expert Settings of the printer driver menu or when Use Media Defined Profile is checked on the bar of the Output field of the Profile Manager menu and also Use Server s Default is set for Output Profile of Expert Settings of the printer driver menu The Media name e g Plain Paper Recycled Paper Thick1 2 3 4 Paper Speciall Special2 Transparency is displayed instead of the profile name when the printer driver of a client computer is set to two way communication This setting and the setting of Appear in One Way Communication Driver as above are mutually exclusive amp GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management I Security ACCESSONES About Available Options 2 hole Punch W Two Way Communication sl epee a Hole Punch Printer IP Address or DNS Name 157 69 163 142 W Update Fiery Driver When Opened Update e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 11 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 9 Confirm
292. s 2 18 2 To Adjust Custom Mode Settings in Full Color Mode All the steps in the adjustment procedure shall be performed by the service technician M WE 7 1 Enter the setting mode 08 Change the value for the code 7614 to enable the functions of the custom mode in the full color mode Value for 08 7614 User mode for full color mode Unused a Used Text Photo base po sed Textbase po Used Printed Image base posed Photo base SU sed Map base SSS The default adjustment value for the custom mode is preset at the one that reproduces the image quality equivalent to that of Text Photo in the full color mode at the time of shipment After setting the value go to the next step OU WE 7 2 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Adjust each setting value for the custom mode to satisfy the user s request e Select the necessary adjustments from the procedures below To make background lighter a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Decrease the values for codes 7661 to make the background lighter 05 code milf EE mode value range value Full color 05 7661 Set 127 or smaller 0 to 255 Manual Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained b To make another adjustment of the background for Full color after the above adjustment enter the adjustment mode 05 and then increase the values for codes 7762 7763 to make the backgro
293. s adjustment DOME 1 Press the EDIT tab on the touch panel and then press the OUTSIDE ERASE button Change the border between the original and areas not belonging to the original by pressing either or as required When you adjust it to side the area to be detected as that not belonging to the original is widened When you adjust it to side the area to be detected as that not belonging to the original is narrowed lt Notes gt The Outside Erase function may not be operated correctly under the following conditions When making copies in a bright room leaving the RADF or the Platen Cover opened The density of areas not belonging to the original is lowered due to outside light When the original has extremely dark areas The extremely dark areas are wrongly detected as areas not belonging to the original and thus erased Tn case of special originals e g a three dimensional object an original with black edges the edges of an opened book Q Caution after the adjustment Areas not belonging to the original may not be erased exactly as the user has requested erased too much or not erased at all depending on the type of the original Also the area to be erased may change depending on the orientation of the original Therefore adjust it carefully while checking the copy image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 82 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 20
294. s been previously adjusted For example using procedure 3 and then procedure 4 clears the adjusted hue using procedure 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 9 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 0 WY C Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct the color balance and copy density After exercising image quality control use procedure 2 Ei a y 2 Perform automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density ADMIN is selected from among the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL options by default In other words an administrator is authorized to operate automatic calibration But the USER option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it Refer to the MFP Management Guide for further information regarding how to select the CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL option e Use steps a through 1 to perform automatic calibration a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the ADMIN tab c Enter an administrator password of 6 to 10 digits Press the ENTER button d Press the GENERAL button e Press the CALIBRATION button f Press the COPY button g Press the CALIBRATION button to print out the test chart h Place the printed test chart on the original glass 1 Press the START button to perform
295. s made without any adjustments the vividness may be insufficient on the copy image Perform saturation adjustment color adjustment color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment and color density adjustment in order to obtain a copy image in vivid colors Q Procedures You can start with any of the procedures other than 5 But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 4 Only if the vividness of R Red is still insufficient even after procedures 1 to 4 have been used the service technician must use procedure 5 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 15 2 Copier specific Adjustments IE 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT button Press the VIVID button After selecting the Vivid option copy and check the copy image quality When the copy image quality with the Vivid option is insufficient cancel the Vivid option and use the next procedure The one touch adjustment can be canceled by pressing the ONE
296. s reserved e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 6 21 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 2 To Use Different Profile for Each Media When Media Types are Mixed Before the adjustment ProfileA i y 7 4 Profil Colors look different when the same profile is Colors look almost the same when a different used for different media types profile is used for each media type Explanation An original file with various media types mixed can be printed with profiles corresponding to each media type e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 22 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 Q Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Create profiles gt Select Calibration Sets and media types gt Perform calibration for each media type Both the service technician and the administrator can use all the procedures All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode The privilege to operate ColorWise Pro Tools and Command Workstation 5 x are limited to the administrator 1 Start up ColorWise Pro Tools or Command Workstation 5 x and then download a profile to be used for a certain media type from Profile Manager to the GA 1211 In case of the profile for a media type is created 2 Assign a Calibration Set and media setting for each profile of media ty
297. s the values set in the MFP Therefore it will affect every user who uses the printer by connecting it to the MFP After the adjustment the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for PCL6 and Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with PCL6 and Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 12 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 4 To Closely Match the Color Balance on the Monitor As viewed on the monitor The color balance as viewed on the monitor The color balance of the printout is closely looks different from the printout matched with the one on the monitor Explanation The color balance on the printouts is initially programmed to provide the maximum color saturation within the range of colors reproducible in printing In general colors which can be reproduced vary depending on whether they are reproduced on the printout or on the monitor or depending on whether they are reproduced in ink or with the light Consequently the color balance on the pri
298. scanned Therefore no clear contrast is made between the background and image Perform background adjustment in order to clearly scan such originals This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes However the adjustment procedure 3 in adjustment mode 05 cannot be performed in the Gray scale mode and the Black mode L Procedures You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 1 Set the density adjustment method to the automatic adjustment by pressing the AUTO button of the EXPOSURE option EIU 2 When scanning the original press the SCAN SETTING button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the q button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density scan the original and check the scanned in image quality With the background density set to the minimum 1f further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the next procedure e ST
299. se Only the Black Toner to Reproduce Gray Areas To use only the black toner to reproduce black and white photos or gradational images Before the adjustment After the adjustment Photo area Photo area Text area gt Text area Using all color toners to reproduce black and Using only the black toner to reproduce black white photo images bitmap data blends and white photo images can diminish undesired undesired colors in the image colors Explanation For printing only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray areas of drawing data lines and text On the other hand all color toners C M Y and K are used to reproduce gray areas of image data such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF This provides a deeper gray on the printouts The following are examples when image data are reproduced using C M Y and K e A gray scale or black and white photo is pasted in photo editing software such as Imaging and Paint Shop Pro in Internet Explorer word processing or spreadsheet software e A semi transparent gray color or gradient of gray is used in the Format AutoShape dialog box on Microsoft Office The gray area printed out as raster data in the same manner as a photo image is reproduced using C M and Y toners or C M Y and K toners Change the option on the printer driver in order to use only the black toner to reproduce the gray area where C M Y and K are used as described above LJ Procedures Both the service technicia
300. sing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the minimum if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied or if you would like to prevent this problem without changing the copy density of text use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 31 2 Copier specific Adjustments E 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7033 to 7034 7041 to 7044 7048 to 7049 7280 and 7680 to 7679 adjust the density level of the background Black lt Automatic adjustment gt Black lt Manual Set a value smaller adjustment gt than 128 Auto color black lt Automatic 05 7677 adjustment gt Auto color black lt Manual 05 7679 adjustment gt Printed Image 05 7048 2 1 and 2 are common settings Set the value in increments of approximately 25 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained After adjusting the background density copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure E 4 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7286 and 7287 to make the range correction operation in the manual density mode fixed e The code to be set differs depending on the original mode Text Photo or Text Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change th
301. ss intensity 05 code aer a mode value range value Set a value larger Full color User custom 05 7795 than 128 0 to 255 129 to 228 lt Note gt Ifthe setting value is too large Moir may appear e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 79 2 Copier specific Adjustments To copy text or photos more clearly This adjustment is effective when you want image quality emphasizing text or photos a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value of the code 7841 to adjust the reproducibility of the Text Photo mode Original Recommended Acceptable Default Set 1 or 2 to emphasize photos Full color User custom 05 7841 Oto 5 Set 4 or 5 to emphasize text Explanation for setting values Setting Reproducibility level Characteristics Dealt l A reproducibility level of photos on printed images POO is higher than that of Photo oriented 1 The reproducibility level of photos on printed images N is higher than that of default oo to default The reproducibility level of text on printed images is The reproducibility level of text on printed images is e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 80 2 Copier specific Adjustments To adjust gamma balance This adjustment is effective when you change the gamma balance of the copied image a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the v
302. steps a to c to register the name a Mark the Save Current setting as checkbox in the Custom Color Settings option b Enter an optional name in the Name option c Select the type you would like to use as the base one from among the Image Quality Type options in Original Image Quality Type Color Balance Image Attribute H Hill Tata Save Curent Settings as Jame o Original Image Quality Type Halftone Resolution 8 os Distinguish Thin Lines Pure Black Apply to Pure Gray Apply to Black Overprint Text ee PostScript Overprint Restore Defaults e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 92 3 Printer specific Adjustments After registering the name open the property page of the printer driver Make sure that the name created for the Image Quality Type option in the Image Quality tab has been registered The icon of the base Image Quality Type will be displayed in the background of the icons for the registered Custom Color Settings The icon of Presentation is displayed in the background as illustrated below n TOSHIBA STUDIO Series P53 Printing Preferences Paper Handing Image Quality Print Job Image Quality Type Normal Print g Frofile Name General had Photograph E Presentation i 23 E Setting 1 Te Protile Setting 2 i Save Profile Delete Restore Defau
303. ster it 3 Print with the registered setting and then check the colors on printouts 4 If the colors are not printed as in the way the user has requested repeat the operation from to re adyjust it In this case the adjustment of the profile and the checking of colors can be performed simultaneously with Color Editor by holding the image file in the hold queue of the Command WorkStation However only one file can be checked and stored in the hold queue L Procedures Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the administrator can use all the procedures All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode Command WorkStation and ColorWise Pro Tools must be installed in a computer in order to perform procedures 1 to 6 below The menus of ColorWise Pro Tools on Macintosh are displayed as in the almost same manner as those for Windows OS Therefore only the menus on Windows OS are introduced in this section Note that ColorWise Pro Tools must be operated under administrator privilege Adjustable files are limited to PS files or EPS files Also if PPD data are attached to a PS file printed from a common application the information of the PPD data will be given priority Therefore be sure to delete PPD data of the PS file in advance following the procedure 6 below 1 Start up Command WorkStation 2 Op
304. stment provides a soft or blurred image in general Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts Especially text and lines on the background of a gradational image and text in the Format AutoShape dialog box with transparency selected on Microsoft Office may be blurred e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 38 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 12 To Make Low resolution Data Look Finer To soften an image Print data fie ER Mew Faroe Tod Heb pe EO aa Favoes Graw yr ou zi Unadjusted settings A smoother softer image is obtained Explanation When a low resolution image is printed the edges may be jagged Decrease the sharpness intensity in order to eliminate the jaggies from the print image The sharpness adjustment will have an effect particularly on photo images such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 39 3 Printer specific Adjustments LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments I 1 Change the Sharpness option on the printer driver For Windows This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Uncheck the Use Sharpness Filter checkbox in the
305. stored is closely different in the color balance from the original matched with that of the original e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 8 4 e Filing specific Adjustments Explanation If a full color image is printed on a client PC and stored in the e Filing box Print to Box it will be optimized for printing on paper This is the reason why the image stored in the e Filing box looks slightly different in the color balance from the original displayed on the computer monitor Change the Image Quality Type setting on the printer driver in order to minimize the difference in the color balance and closely match the color balance of the image stored with that of the original Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments Print to Box PCL5c This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in the Auto mode or the Color mode ME 1 Open the property page of the printer driver Select General from among the Image Quality Type options in the Image Quality tab General allows the image to be stored in colors which are closely matched with the original compared to the other Image Quality Type options Printing Preferences Basic Frishing Popes Handing Image Quat Print Job 3 Mormal Pririt g El ee Profile Name FJ General ud Image Quality Type erate Presentation ee 400 ay pap
306. t update it to the latest one e After these settings the machine may go into the wait status since the fusing temperature can not follow depending on the usage conditions such as low temperature thick paper just recovering after warming up etc e After these settings the fusing performance may degrade depending on the usage conditions such as low temperature thick paper just recovering after warming up etc In such a case return the setting to default e These settings extend the First Print Out Time by the period of time required for pre running of the first printing e These settings always perform the pre running for the first printing of each job by the time required for pre running of the first print This results in reducing the life of consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 20 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box E U Ii 3 Use the thick paper mode when you print on plain paper e If the thick paper mode is used printing decelerates but image quality becomes more stable because differences in color or temperatures during continuous printing will be reduced e Set the thick paper mode following steps a to 1 below a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press DRAWER in the USER menu d Select a drawer that you want to s
307. t dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exencitation ullan 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 E Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Awam multa vitiose and non distriv et indical on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew uira Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam compor ndaents im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam corpor nmderits im volupate velite illum dolore teu lid ac mull parariatur Monnurm Jsmod tempor inciunt ut labore al dolore magna E arai a ere Ui enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ulam compor ndenis im volupate velila ilium dolore feu fupiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullam 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 The hues of highlighters are not accurately The areas marked with 2 different colored reproduced The areas marked with 2 different highlighters are accurately reproduced colored highlighters are reproduced in the and distinguishable on the copy same hue They are indistinguishable Explanation When an original containing text or areas marked with highlighters is copied their hues may somet
308. t print image The menu to select varies according to the operating system Refer to the table below and select the menu Printer Features gt Feature Sets Color settings 4 gt Sharpness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan Magenta Preview Cancel Print Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause rough edges of the image contained in low resolution bitmap data As a result outlined edges may look shaded black bands may appear and toner may be scattered around the lines Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the printouts e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 35 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 11 To Obtain a Softer Image Before the adjustment After the adjustment Unadjusted settings A softer image is obtained Explanation Decrease the sharpness intensity under the menu on the printer driver in order to obtain a softer print image The sharpness adjustment will have an effect particularly on photo images such as BMP GIF JPEG and TIFF e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 36 LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments I 1 Change the Sharpness
309. t the Print Image Quality in the Color Mode c cccseseeeeeeees 3 47 3 14 2 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Black and White Mode 3 55 To Make the Light Colored Area Darker on the Printout ccccceeee 3 59 To Clearly Print Thin Lines Double LIN S ccceccceseeeeeeeeeeteeeeetaeeeeeanes 3 65 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner To Print in the Toner oWO OS epa E E vawateaa cua vanssanadauanes 3 68 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Table of Contents 3 18 3 19 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 23 3 24 3 25 3 26 To Adjust the Image Density in the Toner Save Mode c ccceceeeeeeeees 3 71 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black c ccccccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 74 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing cccesccsseeceeeceeeeeeecseeseeseneeesseesees 3 76 To Sharply Print Black Text ccccccccccssececeeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeesseeeessaeeesseeesaees 3 79 To Prevent Dark Toner from Coming Off ccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaees 3 89 To Register the Image Quality Adjusted Corresponding to a Preference To use the Custom Color Settings cccccseccecsscceceeeeeseeeeeseeeesseesesseeesseeeeseeeees 3 91 To Print a Full Color Original in TWO Colors ccccccccseseeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaees 3 94 elo TOAG TOJO cameo een ncn eee enn ee eee ee 3 95 3 24 2 To Adjust the
310. ted Area where the density is adjusted High density area a ae Medium density area a a Low density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 67 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 16 4 To Adjust the Tint of Specified Colors for Twin Color or Single Color Copying Explanation In twin color or single color copying the tint of the color specified from the control panel can be changed by adjusting the toner amount of the color Y M C or K Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments M 1 Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values of codes 7644 to 7653 to adjust the value of Y M C or K for the tint of the specified color 2 After changing the setting value reboot the equipment and check the tint of the image printed in twin color or single color copying Select the subcode 0 to 3 depending on which toner color Y M C and K you want to change When the subcode for the specified color Y M C or K is larger the toner amount for the adjusted color increases when the former is smaller the latter decreases If the value is too large the density becomes too dark and the reproducibility of gradations in the high density area may become blurred and degraded Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print ima
311. ter adjusting the fusing temperature perform automatic calibration Refer to step 2 in 1 1 To Obtain a Darker Image lt Hint gt The smaller the setting value is the lower the fusing temperature becomes It is usually recommended that the set value be decreased in order to suppress roughness on the high density area of the image Adjust the value while checking the image carefully because 1f the value is too small insufficient fusing may occur Since temperatures on the long side of the paper cannot be kept in a proper balance the same value must be set for the 08 codes 5293 and 5294 unless otherwise required so After setting the value print and check the image quality If further image quality adjustment is necessary go to step 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 14 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box E I WW 3 Check the life of the consumables particularly the drum developer material and fuser unit and replace them if necessary e When replacing any consumable use steps a to c a Enter the PM support mode Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable part to 0 For further information regarding the PM support mode refer to the Service Manual b Enter adjustment mode 05 Select code 2742 Press the START button e Image quality control will be performed and the image quality c
312. than 128 05 7971 0 1 2 to decrease the density Cyan Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area After setting the values copy and check the copy image quality Only if the vividness of R Red is still insufficient even after all the above procedures have been used must the service technician use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 17 2 Copier specific Adjustments i I 5 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for code 2905 to adjust the transfer 1st transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias for C Cyan and K Black so as to increase the density of R Red e The code to use varies according to the paper type and color to adjust Adjust the value for the subcode corresponding to the color for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 5 to obtain the h
313. that the created profile is displayed on the Output Profile field of the Profile Manager The settings above are necessary for preparation of the calibration for Thick 2 Paper Repeat the procedure if required to create profiles Thick 3 or 4 Paper or Recycled Paper Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Do not forget to uncheck Apply to all calibration sets of Calibrator 660 1 Select Measurement Method ColorCal HH 2 Check Print Settings Calibration Set Measured 10 29 07 6 17 23 PM By User user Method ColorCal F j Restore Device e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C Calibrator GA 1210CAA1_TeO035CMFP Standard Expert 3 Generate Measurement Page Print 4 Get Measurements Measure FromFile 5 Print Pages optional Comparison Pages 6 View Measurements optional Measurements Table all calibration sets I Customize 3 fi i Save to File J Apply Done 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 12 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 1 4 Confirmation of Calibration Result Explanation The Measurement vs Target graph of the View Measurement of Calibrator shows the tone characteristics of the target image with a bold line and those of the printer engine in the MFP without calibration with a thin line The graph indicates how tone characteristics deviate from those of the target image not the tone characterist
314. the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 36 2 Copier specific Adjustments E W 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel and select the original mode option as follows e To copy in the Full color or the Auto color mode Select the Printed image mode option e To copy in the Black mode Select the Photo mode option To have the above original mode options selected by default use the following procedures To change the default original mode on the Control Panel Use steps a to d to change default original mode a Press the USER FUNCTIONS button on the Control Panel to enter the User Functions menu b Press the USER tab c Press the COPY button d In the ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR or BLACK option press the button corresponding to the desired original mode option To change the default original mode in setting mode 08 Enter setting mode 08 Change the value for code 9970 or 9976 to change the original mode option which is selected by default at power on e In the Black mode Value for 08 9970 Default original mode at power on P Text Photo default po Photo 3 Image smoothing o 4 Usercustom S O e In the Full color mode Value for 08 9976 Default origin
315. this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 2 Only the service technician must use procedure 3 and 4 IF 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the D button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure W 2 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary the service technician must use the following procedure 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7796 7797 7806 and 7807 to make the copied text darker the sharpness level increases e In the adjustment mode 05 original modes that allow the adjustment of the sharpness level for the Auto Color mode is only the TEXT PHOTO mode and the TEXT mode Set a value larger than 128 for each code oe Acceptable Original mode 05 code
316. tic trends Relocation to higher ground depends on climatic trends Light colored thin lines and text are dotted on The light colored thin lines and text are clearly the printout printed out Explanation When light colored thin lines and text are printed they may be dotted on the printout Change the options on the printer driver adjust the color balance or gamma curve balance in order to print them out clearly Q Procedures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the print image quality in the Color mode or in the Black and White mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the user s particular request The item to set varies depending on the type of data to adjust Select the effective option according to the data format to adjust such as a print image raster data text font and line drawing graphic data e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 46 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 14 1 To Adjust the Print Image Quality in the Color Mode Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 2 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedures 4 and 5 ME 1 Change the Image Quality Type and Halftone options For Windows PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Open the property page of the pr
317. tment is still desired for the reproducibility of background should this adjustment be performed e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 70 2 Copier specific Adjustments LJ Procedures The service technician must perform all adjustments E I 1 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 3009 or 3010 to adjust the reproducibility of the background when using the RADF Acceptable Full color 05 3009 Set a value larger than 3 to increase the background density m 0 to 4 Set a value smaller than 2 to decrease the Black 05 3010 background density Set the value in increments of approximately 1 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained When changing the value from the default value for the first time it is recommended to set Ls The table below shows you the correlation between the value and image quality Advantage of image quality ie heehee Default equivalent to the one obtained when an original placed on the original glass is scanned Lighter background is reproduced than the one obtained when 2 is eae Light default value is set Darker background is reproduced than the one obtained when the default value is set Darker background is reproduced than the one obtained when 3 is set Lighter background is reproduced than the one obtained when the 4 After setting the value copy and check the image
318. to Acceptable Y Yellow M Magenta oaa ie Beis Set a value larger than 128 C Cyan oor K om Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is Black obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 11 3 Printer specific Adjustments Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in details with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by default It is intended to automatically select Smooth or Detail in accordance with Apply to of the halftone option the selected Color and Image Quality Type options as described in the table below Color and Image Quality Type options Apply to Auto Color Black and Twin General Photograph White Color Ta etc The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area lt Note gt This adjustment change
319. to those in the binary mode e The adjustment of density will be effective only if STANDARD is selected from among the IMAGE QUALITY FOR BLACK options e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 4 2 4 e Filing specific Adjustments 4 2 To Store an Original while Reducing the File Size Before the adjustment After the adjustment a ff L NKnAWwKnyv Arf L U ii FA L L i 7 gt Jit T 1 i d oF GREATER TOKYO AA 4 TOSHIBA i TOSHIBA When LOW is from among the When HIGH is from among the compression rate options the file size will compression rate options the file size will become larger than required be reduced LJ Explanation When an original is scanned in the Full color or the Gray scale mode and stored in the e Filing box Scan to Box it will be compressed into JPEG format The data compression rate can be selected on a job by job basis The file size significantly varies depending on the selected data compression rate When LOW is selected from among the compression rate options the file size will be 2 to 3 times larger than the one when HIGH is selected When storing the original if a higher priority is given to file size reduction than the image quality change the compression rate This adjustment will have an effect on images stored using Scan to File and Scan to E mail LJ Procedures Both the service technici
320. ts PCL6 Ps3 XPS QYECHR This adjustment will have an effect only on Black and white mode printing E 2 Enter adjustment mode 05 Increase the values for codes 7315 to 7320 to adjust the gamma curve balance and increase the density on Black and White mode printing e Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below PDL 05 code Subcode Recommen Acceptable ded value value range Automatic Text 05 7360 Automatic Graphics 05 7361 Automatic Image 05 3762 OI Set a value PCL6 Automatic Text 05 7363 larger than 0 to 255 128 Automatic Graphics 05 7364 E 128 Automatic Image 05 7365 OA 05 7365 05 7320 0 1 2 Automatic Text 05 7365 Automatic Graphics __05 7366___ Automatic Image 05 7367 Se 05 7319 0 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained When the halftone is set to Auto the gamma balance can be adjusted for every print data format Text Graphic and Image The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Whether to fix or change the maximum density in a high density area can be selected by the setting of 05 8066 Area where the density
321. ts Color settings 4 gt Sharpness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Sharpness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO Presets Standard Color Settings 2 Color Balance Cyan Magenta 7 PDFw Preview lt Hint gt In addition to the sharpness adjustment decreasing Brightness moving to the side changing Contrast or increasing Saturation moving to the side may improve the image quality After changing the option on the printer driver print and check the print image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 51 3 Printer specific Adjustments PCL6 This adjustment will have an effect only on Auto or Color mode printing Wi 3 Open the property page of the printer driver Press the Setting button in the Image Quality tab Mark the Detail checkbox in the Color Balance tab Press the Edit button Set the value for the Low Middle density of the color you would like to adjust within a range of 1 to 4 in the Color Balance Details option This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the Windows PCL6 or PS3 emulation printer driver This adjustment cannot be performed on a Macintosh printer driver Initially set 4 and check the printout Color Balance Detail Restore Defaults OF Cancel After
322. ty adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 2 1 General Adjustments Copying Printing and e Filing Output from Box EI YW 3 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 2934 to 2937 to adjust the transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to increase the density of the image e The code to use varies according to the paper type Adjust the value for 05 code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality Set the value within a range of 2 to 8 to obtain the highest density of the image Recommended Acceptable i 1 ick 2 2 ik 3 Front 05 2934 2 to 8 0 to 10 Se l eee 2 Recycled pipor paper Full color Thick4 __ 8 4 a ik maz 2 Miks 3 Back 05 2935 2 to 8 0 to 10 Se l areca 2 2 Recycled paper paper Tika d 8B S 4 pi 1 pi 2 2 Thick 3 3 Front 05 2936 2 to 8 0 to 10 Se l ee 2 Rested paper paper Black Thick4 ft 4 it l thick 2 2 mi 3 Back 05 2937 2 to 8 0 to 10 Se l oneal Z Rested pipo paper Thick 4 4 Front refers to the printed side in the simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing downwards in the duplex mode Back refers to the printed side that is delivered facing upwards in the duplex mode e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA
323. ty by 25 If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly For instance if the center value is decreased by 25 softer the value of each step of the indicator will also be decreased by 25 softer However the range of adjustment values that is valid for sharpness level change is from 100 to 100 of the total of the setting value of the adjustment code and that of the indicator For instance if the setting value of the adjustment code is 103 25 from the default value the limit of the steps in the soft side of the indicator is 3 If the step is set at 4 the image quality will not be changed 4 3 2 I O 1 2 43 4 st UU U amp UU U sr ee ee E E O S E E Default 100 50 50 25 0 25 50 75 100 Assigned adjustment value of sharpness Setting value 103 199 100 75 50 25 0 25 50 75 Since 25 is assigned to the center the image quality remains the same even if the indicator is changed from TO to Aan lt Note gt Minimizing the edges of the copy image and Sharpening the copy image are mutually contradictory When the adjustment is performed to minimize the edges the resolution of the copy image may decrease After decreasing the sharpness intensity copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA
324. ugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupal Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nosinud exercitation ullam compor nmderits im volupate velite illum dolore feu i ac mull parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt u labore at dolore magna ory eral Ty ui enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exencitation a capar nderits am volupale valite iien arrene aonr inclunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ullan 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 12 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy After the adjustment E Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Awam multa vitiose and non distriv et indical on ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew uira Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunl ut labore et dolore magna aliquam eral volupat Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostred exercitation ullam compor ndants im volupate velite illum dolore feu fugiat null parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquam erat volupal Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nosinud exerciiation ulam compor mderits im volupate valite illum dolore feu i al muil parariatur Monrmurm usmod tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magna arr eral ey ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud exercitation ulam compar ndenis im volupate velila iim parariatur Monnumy ejusmod tempor inciunt ut labore e
325. und lighter Density Recommended Acceptable 05 code Se _fangevae PHO 05 7762 Full color 05 7763 Set 128 or larger 0 to 255 Adjust the density level while checking the color balance since it may differ from that of the original after the adjustment Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 78 2 Copier specific Adjustments To copy while eliminating the background color to adjust the reference value for the background density adjustment This adjustment is effective when you do not copy the dark color of the background of an original a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7777 and 7778 to make the range correction operation fixed e The code to be set differs depending on the density mode Select the 05 code for the target original mode and change the value to 0 Original Density 05 code Recommended Acceptable mode mode value range value 05 7777 Explanation for setting values Setting value Range correction operation Fixed To increase the sharpness intensity This adjustment is effective when you want to copy light text thin lines or illustrations more clearly a Enter the adjustment mode 05 Change the value for the code 7795 to adjust the default value for the sharpne
326. und eart l Things to have for Equipment Things to have for an emergency Plasblight boop one by beth in cars and an emergency You ew te sper own for a miima a work Dow t forgat evn bemeries De ol You awy be oe roor ove fe a ire Have A Family Plan Discuss with fanily members vhat Text looks black on the monitor But the hue The hue of the text is nearly matched with the will vary if it is printed out in the Full color black hue on the monitor mode Explanation Text looks black on the monitor But if it 1s printed in the Full color mode with Auto selected from among the Color options all color toners C M Y and K will be used to print it depending on the application in use As a result the black hue on the printout looks different from what the user desires This problem is caused by the application specifications not by the printer Particularly the following factors may print black text using all color toners C M Y and K when a PDF file is printed out e The file of black text CMY 0 K 100 is printed on the PCL6 printer driver e Black text is treated as image data instead of text data on the file e Black text is not defined as 100 black RGB 0 or CMY 0 K 100 on the file Change the option on the printer driver or adjust the color balance in order to nearly match the hue of the black text on the file in which these factors may be included with the black hue As a point to remember
327. ure Sets Color settings 4 gt Brightness 10 3 x 10 4 x 10 5x_ Color Settings 2 gt Brightness Printer TOSHIBA e STUDIO HH oe Presets Standard HH Color Settings 2 HH Color Balance Cyan Magenta Image Attribute Sharpness Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular LJ Remarks The brightness adjustment does not affect black text CMY 100 K 100 or RGB 0 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 25 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 8 To Adjust the Overall Saturation Before the adjustment pr lt i S T P a ya mA So ae Fi a a F MS gid P A i i i y Hh hy ig i E Pea Ta i wt The image is printed with a natural saturation Default printing After the adjustment The saturation is decreased The saturation is increased LJ Explanation The saturation of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the Saturation option on the printer driver e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 26 3 Printer specific Adjustments Q Procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedure 1 Only if the saturation of R Red is still insufficient even after procedure 1 has been used must the service technician use procedure 2 Mf 1 Change the Saturation
328. ures The procedure to use varies depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in the Black mode Full color mode or Auto color mode Refer to the procedure corresponding to the particular user s request e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 1 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Black Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 2 and 4 Only the service technician must use procedures 3 5 and 6 E T 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the button to increase the copy density Eg IEO After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the SHARPNESS button Press the SHARP button to increase the sharpness intensity After increasing the sharpness intensity copy and check
329. use the next procedure i W 4 Enter adjustment mode 05 Change the values for codes 7960 to 7979 and 7980 to 7983 to adjust the density level of each color te o Originai mode Originai mode 05 code Recommended value Acceptable Default te ust value table Default Yellow C map 05 7968 07172 Magenta Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density Prg __Text Photo 05 7970 0 1 2 Set a value smaller than 128 05 7971 0 1 2 to decrease the density cyan Usercustom 05 7982 O 1 2 Set the value in increments of approximately 10 while checking the copy image until the optimum value is PT Text Photo 05 7975 O 1 2 05 7976 O 1 2 K Black obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 58 2 Copier specific Adjustments The value for the code corresponding to the original mode Text Photo Text or Printed image will affect the copy image quality in the Full color mode and the Auto color mode The subcode varies according to the area where the density is adjusted Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted Area where the density is adjusted Low density area Medium density area High density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular Remarks e Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Other
330. usted Lo 0 Low density area Medium density area Precautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy image Remarks Enter a value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures Otherwise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 33 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in the Full Color Mode You can start with any of the procedures But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order as listed below You can use one procedure in conjunction with another But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses the effectiveness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 and 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 2 M 1 Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel Press the BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT button Press the LIGHT button to decrease the background density After decreasing the background density copy and check the copy imag
331. value for 05 code corresponding to the print option to be applied PDL and Halftone Ex When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected PCL6 Image Quality Type General Halftone Auto gt Text area graphic area and image area Change the values for Y 05 8058 M 05 8059 C 05 8060 and K 05 8061 e When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected Image Type Photograph Halftone Smooth gt Change the values for Y 05 8050 M 05 8051 C 05 8052 and K 05 8053 Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript See the PS3 row in the table below Color to Acceptable Y Yellow me M Magenta e255 1o Set a value larger than 128 C Cyan Black Set the value in increments of approximately 20 while checking the printouts until the optimum value is obtained e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 62 3 Printer specific Adjustments Halftone refers to how halftones are printed Two options are available Smooth which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and Detail which is intended to print halftones in details with the high frequency The halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the Halftone options on the printer driver Windows or in the print dialog box Macintosh Auto is selected from among the Apply to options by d
332. veness of the adjustment restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original ones Then use other procedures Both the service technician and the user can use procedures 1 to 3 Only the service technician must use procedure 4 UW 0 UW 2 I 3 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Press the button to increase the copy density After increasing the copy density copy and check the copy image quality With the copy density set to the maximum if further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Perform color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the tint of the colors in general e Use steps a through d to perform the adjustment a Press the IMAGE button on the Control Panel b Press the COLOR BALANCE button to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner c Press the button to enhance the tint of the color or the button to decrease it After selecting the color balance by changing the amount of toner C M Y and K press the DETAIL button The tint of the color can be adjusted according to density area low medium or high density area d Press the ENTER button After adjusting the tint of the colors copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select TEXT from among the
333. ver must be changed e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 38 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments All the adjustments will be effective only when images are printed with a PS3 printer driver in the Full color mode 1 Open the printer driver properties and then click the Image icon on the Fiery Printing tab page 2 Check Image Smoothing amp GA 1211 PS v1 0 Properties Fiery Printing PostScript About ant BB amp fB 5 A EA Untitled F Basic Job Into Media Layout Color Image f Finishing WDF Stamping Printer Image Defaults Job View a Toner Save L Toner Reduction G Off O n Brightness oharpness Halftone Printer Status Rid Wid wt Idle Image Quality Normal O Best LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 6 39 6 Printer specific Adjustments GA 1211 6 7 To Suppress Moire or Jagginess on Photographs Before the adjustment After the adjustment Moir occurs on the photo image The image is printed clearly without Moir Explanation When photographs are printed Moir may appear over the image or the edges of the image may become jaggy To suppress them im
334. w 12 24 32 27 17 2 a 3 e0 13 B 40 ET 11 10 20 BT a 3 7 2r 40 12 I z 5 So 1r 18 National Use internet use will be boosted worldwide The availability of advanced telecommunications ts also expected to fuel explosive growth in regions D and E The launch of the amp 8th communications satellite will also add a significant capability in terms of providing universal access Internet Growth to 2090 Internet Growth to 2090 ere we Be Me Tarih paN The OTT EE epad 10 apnence ONEA Y A Bi a eas CRpeOaty TOL MeCateD N ee map sp E D dL sewal in Bote ngih ed eth ple regi ad in apes son parimi aripa henep a E D ang a8 well im Some ner and Bou polar reponse and in space Mabon conneries Treet in countries hai iplernenied internet infrasinactuna carty on eel recommarily bo raar eh Grosth in courtes that unplerrerted romet wfrastvciure carly on wil necessarty be slower athoug gt mae derop ipho eal widen fo incode appicebors tor precios cfedre weer demographics atl wider fo BERBER EB BRR RRR RRP RRR eee ee eee 2 DQ a made app catons tor preschool cidem n BEBE ey Eeoa Treasdotscc Treo Thei Treat oo Ps ry Beeson eect Meme Thesa rN SEC SES PES 20 32 ZK re aae ame aay D J E in 60 13 3 Det 10 20 ar ika w Gew 12 15 5 18 i Carit J 10 10 13 Maa panie 5 1 23 BG FEI J w Hg 3 Sou Poin O Morh Pois i 1 78 eS Sy eee L The light colored ar
335. wise it may cause a loss in MFP performance including degradation in the image quality and a reduction in the life of the consumables e If the adjustment causes a toner fixing problem decrease the values for codes 05 7905 to 7911 e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2 59 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 14 To Obtain Smooth Gray Scale Photo Images Before the adjustment After the adjustment ji PTER j TU ia T Halftones are not accurately reproduced Halftones are reproduced better Explanation When a photo image or gradational image is copied in the Black mode with the Text Photo mode selected halftones are not accurately reproduced Select the Photo mode or the Image smoothing mode from among the original mode options in order to reproduce halftones better in the Black mode LJ Procedures Both the service technician and the user can perform all adjustments E 1 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select PHOTO from among the original mode options To have PHOTO selected from among the original mode options by default refer to procedure 1 in 2 8 To Eliminate Moir After selecting the Photo mode copy and check the copy image quality If further image quality adjustments are still necessary use the next procedure i 2 Press the BASIC button on the Control Panel Select IMAGE SMOOTHING from among the original mode options T
336. y appear depending on the operating environment of the MFP Therefore carefully perform the adjustment while checking the copy or print image e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 1 28 2 Copier specific Adjustments 2 1 To Copy Text Clearly To eliminate faint smudged or blurred text Before the adjustment After the adjustment The occurrence of errors has been increasing Gradually every year Duis aute ihure repreheo nderit volupate 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 E Hanc ego cum tene sententiam Adipiscing consecterur sed diam Auam multa vitiose and mon distriv et indicat on Ingenion Sumde enim bon et malute puew utra Monnumy ejusmed tempor inciunt ut labore et dolore magni aliquam rat yolupunt i TOSHIBA TOSHIBA Activities for the Family Your Kids Rate their Favorites Activities for the Family Your Kids Rate their Favorites wier beach Activities siqghturring shoppeq f f C2 Comival lucade Games Educational Aitivibies Results based ow a survey of Taihwind Premier Kids When a light print image is copied the text The graphic image and text look darker and looks blurred sharper Explanation Perform image processing in order to obtain a sharp and dark copy image when copying an original containing light text and graphic images or a light copy image when copying an original containing a highly colored text and copy image Q Proced
337. ype and Halftone options For instance if the value for 05 code for Smooth is changed it will be applied to printing performed with Halftone Smooth or Auto selected Carefully perform the adjustment being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment LJ Precautions after the completion of the adjustment If White is selected in the Twin color mode all areas other than black will not be printed White toner will not be used to print these areas e STUDIO2040C 2540C 3040C 3540C 4540C 2011 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 3 99 3 Printer specific Adjustments 3 24 2 To Adjust the Sharpness ME 1 Select Twin Color from among the Color options on the printer driver For Windows Open the property page of the printer driver Select Twin Color from among the Color options in the Basic tab Press the Details button Select the color to use for the area other than black from among the Color options Original Paper Size E Normal Frint Letter 181 2211 4 Print Paper Size I Image Scale H Same as Original Size ioo a 25 400 Paper Source Paper Type Plain Destination Exit Trap Settings Number of Copies Profile None Orientation Save Profile Delete Restore Defaults gusnnnuuunnnununnnnnnn Twin Color h Details

File No. SME11002600 R110621J9200-TTEC Ver00_2011-08

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents